<!doctype tei.2 public '-//TEI//DTD TEI Tools 0.1//EN'> <!-- $Id$ --> <TEI.2 lang='en'> <!-- --------------------------------------------------------------------- --> <teiHeader> <fileDesc> <titleStmt> <title> GoldED+ Reference Manual </title> </titleStmt> <sourceDesc> <p> Created in electronic form. </p> </sourceDesc> </fileDesc> <profileDesc> <langUsage> <language id="en"> English </language> </langUsage> </profileDesc> </teiHeader> <!-- --------------------------------------------------------------------- --> <text> <!-- --------------------------------------------------------------------- --> <front> <titlePage> <docTitle> <titlePart type=main> GoldED+ </titlePart> <titlePart type=desc> Reference Manual </titlePart> </docTitle> <docAuthor> Odinn Sorensen, Dirk A. Mueller, Alexander S. Aganichev and others </docAuthor> <docDate> 1990-2003 </docDate> </titlePage> <divGen type=toc> </front> <!-- --------------------------------------------------------------------- --> <body> <!-- --------------------------------------------------------------------- --> <div1> <head> Introduction </head> <p> <name/GoldED+/ is a successor of the wellknown <name/GoldED/ mail editor originally written by <name/Odinn Sorensen/. </p> <p> <name/GoldED+/ is run under <name/DOS/ with 32-bit <abbr/DPMI/ driver, <name/Microsoft Windows/, <name>IBM OS/2</name>, <name/Linux/, <name/FreeBSD/, <name/QNX/, and <name/BeOS/. There should be no serious problem to compile it on other <name/UNIX/-like systems running on <name/Intel/ <name/80x86/ architecture. Unlike the original version of <name/GoldED/, <name/GoldED+/ is not supported on CPUs lower than <name/80386/. </p> <p> <name/GoldED+/ takes his history from the patch collection made by <name/Alexander Aganichev/. A lot of code was contributed to <name/GoldED+/ by different people around the world. At least, <name/GoldED+/ contains portions of code written by the core team of <name/GoldED/ (<name/Odinn Sorensen/, <name>Dirk A. Mueller</name>, and <name/Leonid Lisovsky/), <name/Mike Smedley/, <name/Pavel Gulchouck/, <name/Denis Zavorotny/, <name/Alexander Batalov/, <name/Eugene Roshal/, <name/Igor Vanin/, <name/Alexey Froloff/, <name/Andrew Shakhmatov/, <name/Roman Trunov/, <name/Alex Druinsky/, <name>Alexander Tsvyashchenko</name>, <name/Pavel Tsekov/, <name/Alexander Reznikov/, <name/Siarzhuk Zharski/ and (of course) by the maintainers of <name/GoldED+/ (<name>Alexander Aganichev</name> and <name/Jacobo Tarrio/). Some portions of code was taken from C/C++ snippets collected by <name/Bob Stouts/ (personal thanks goes to <name/Thad Smith/, <name/Raymond Gardner/, <name/Jeff Dunlop/, <name/Mark G. Mendel/, <name/Gary S. Brown/, <name/John Rex/, and <name/Walter Bright/) and some other from <name/GNU/ libraries (thanks goes to <name/GNU/ C library maintainers, <name/Rob Swindell/, <name/Frank Pilhofer/, <name/Haruhiko Okumura/, <name>Haruyasu Yoshizaki</name>, <name/SLang/ maintainers, <name/TIN/ maintainers, and <name/Eric Newton/). Also, there are portions of code which are courtesy of various FTN software authors: <name/Scott J. Dudley/ and <name>Lanius Corporation</name>, <name/Bit Bucket Software/, <name/Husky Team/, <name/Thomas Waldmann/, <name/Peter Davies/, <name/Ron Clark/, <name/Tobias Burchhardt/, <name/Andreas Klein/, <name>Folkert J. Wijnstra</name>, <name/Gerard J. van der Land/, <name/Peter Stewart/ and <name/InterZone Software, Inc./, <name/Marco Maccaferri/, <name/Wynn Wagner III/, <name/Andrew Milner/ and <name>Continental Software</name>, <name/Bjarne Maschoreck/, <name/Roger Kirchhoff/, <name/Stefan Graf/, <name/Nicolai Dufva/, and <name/Morten Baun/. If you feel that your name is missed here please drop an e-mail to the <name/GoldED+/ maintainers. </p> <p> We also need to thanks all that people who have contributed configuration files: <name/Richard Menedetter/, <name/Peter Karlsson/, <name/Daniel Hahler/, <name/Marco Van den Bovenkamp/, <name>Steve Shapiro</name>, <name/Teddy Winstead/, <name/Richard Merit/, <name/Thomas Kraft/, <name/Magnus Jacobsen/, <name/Lars Pehrsson/, <name/Tony Van den Bogaert/, <name/Karsten Palmvig/, <name>Michael Hembo</name>, <name/Thomas Endres/, <name/Nathan Moschkin/, <name/Micheal Dunnagan/, <name/Joseph Carnage/, <name/Thomas Endres/, <name/Niels Axelsson/, <name/Gustav Brock/, <name/Stig Jacobsen/, <name/Erik Wachtmeester/, <name/Dirk Frieborg/, <name/Gd'A/, <name/Cees Schouten/, <name/Andrew Voronin/, <name/Arkady Grikurov/, <name/Mik Karlsson/, <name/K. Simonsen/, <name/Thomas Gradin/, <name/Andre van de Wijdeven/, <name/Robert Bashe/, <name>Kees Bergwerf</name>, <name/Ferdinand Grassmann/, <name/Laurent Jumet/, <name/Andrew Porokhnyak/, and <name/Oleksandr Liutyi/. </p> <p> Special thanks goes to <name/Fra`2k/ for helping in testing :-) </p> </div1> <!-- --------------------------------------------------------------------- --> <div1> <head> License Agreement and Copyright Notices </head> <p> <name/GoldED+/ - Copyright © 1990-1999 by <name/Odinn Sorensen/, copyright © 1999-2002 by <name/Alexander S. Aganichev/, <name/Jacobo Tarrio/ and others. </p> <p> <name/GoldED+/ and the <name/Goldware Utilities/ are covered by the <name/GNU General Public License</name> (<name/GPL/), version 2. For details see the file <code/COPYING/. </p> <p> The <name/Goldware Library/ is licensed under the <name>GNU Library General Public License</name> (<name/LGPL/), version 2. For the full text of the license, see the file <code/COPYING.LIB/. If necessary to comply with <name/GPL/, <name/the Goldware Library/ is also licensed under <name/GPL/, version 2. </p> <p> Additionally, permission is hereby specifically given to link <name/GoldED+/, the <name/Goldware Utilities/ and the <name>Goldware Library</name> with any software or software library that meets the <name/Open Source Definition/, as given on <xref type='URL'>http://www.opensource.org</xref>. This includes <name/GPL/, <name/LGPL/, <name/BSD/, <name/X Consortium/, <name/Artistic/, <name/MozPL/, <name/QPL/ and most derivatives of <name/MozPL/. </p> <p> The additional permission to link with <name>non-GPL/LGPL</name> software may be slightly controversial. The intent is to allow developers a greater freedom to create specialized versions of GoldED. Examples could be a <abbr/GUI/ <name/KGoldED/ linked with <name/QT/, a <name/MozGoldED/ mail/news component for <name/Mozilla/ using <name/NGLayout/ for displaying <abbr/HTML/, a <name/GoldED+/ with an embedded <name/Perl/ scripting engine or whatever. However, we cannot allow the core <name/GoldED+/ or <name/Goldware Library/ to be dependent on these specialized versions, so developers should take care to make their specialized modifications modular and <q/stubifiable/ if necessary. </p> <p> Parts of the <name/Goldware Library/ is derived from the source of the old shareware <name/CXL/ 5.2 library by <name/Mike Smedley/, from which <name/Odinn Sorensen/ bought a source license many years ago. <name/Odinn/ has made very extensive modifications (for example, the original was <name/DOS/ only), but much code is essentially unchanged (<code/gwin*.cpp/). <name/CXL/ was taken over from <name/Mike Smedley/ by <name/Innovative Data Concepts/ (<name/IDC/), which renamed it <name/TCXL/ and continued development along somewhat different lines, which <name/Odinn/ did not agree with (or at least not easily port <name/GoldED/ to). However, it seems that <name/TCXL/ never really became successful. At least <name/Odinn/ could not find anything new about <name/TCXL/ and <name/Innovative Data Concepts/ on the <name/Internet/ (as of november 15, 1998). <name/Odinn/ could not even find <name/IDC/'s website, so in this day and age where any succesful business has a website, <name/Odinn/ suspects that they no longer exist. <name/Odinn/ even tried to find <name/Mike Smedley/, but apparently he has vanished off the face of the earth, or has lost interest in programming entirely. <name/Odinn/ found some postings (on <name/DejaNews/) on a sports newsgroup by a <name/Mike Smedley/, but he doubts that it's the same guy. </p> <p> So, even though parts of the <name/Goldware Library/ technically are still copyrighted by <name/Mike Smedley/, <name/Odinn/ see so serious problems in using them. If anyone should happen to know <name>Mike Smedley</name> and how to contact him, <name/Odinn Sorensen/ would very much appreciate to get the information, so we can clear up this issue. </p> <p> <name/Squish/ and <name/Maximus/ are trademarks of <name>Lanius Corporation</name>. </p> <p> <name/JAM(mbp)/ - Copyright © 1993 <name/Joaquim Homrighausen/, <name/Andrew Milner/, <name/Mats Birch/, <name/Mats Wallin/. </p> <p> Products and company names listed are trademarks or trade names of their respective companies. </p> </div1> <!-- --------------------------------------------------------------------- --> <div1> <head> The Message Database Formats </head> <div2> <head> Opus, FTS-0001 </head> <p> These are two variants of the same type of msgbase. It works by using one physical file per message (<code/1.msg/, <code/2.msg/ etc.), collecting them in a directory for each area. Depending on the clustersize on the harddisk, this can be a very wasteful and slow way to store messages. With a clustersize of about 512 bytes, the waste may be acceptable, but the access speed can be dramatically slow if there are many <code/*.msg/ files, due to the file system. Cache adjustments can improve it, but there are limits. </p> <p> In echomail areas, this format has a special quirk: The first message (<code/1.msg/) is normally used to store the so-called <q/highwatermark/. The highwatermark tells the echomail processor where it should start scanning for new messages entered by users. By deleting (zapping) the highwatermark, you can make the echomail processor re-scan the whole area again. This may cause messages to be sent out as <q/dupes/, so this should be used sparingly and carefully, if at all! The highwatermark can also be <q/heated/ - which means that it is set to the last msg in the area. This prevents the echomail processor from finding newly entered unscanned msgs. Use with care. </p> <p> The variants: The <name/Opus/ format originated in the <name/Opus/ <abbr/BBS/ system. It put some <name/Fido/ undocumented (?) fields to use as date/time stamps. The <name/FTS-0001/ (defined in FTS-0001, revision 12 and later) format uses the undocumented fields to set the zone/point information for the message. To the authors knowledge, the <name/Opus/ variant is the dominant, and the <name/FTS-0001/ variant is doomed to oblivion. If in doubt, use the <name/Opus/ format. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> QuickBBS, RemoteAccess, and Hudson </head> <p> This msgbase format was invented by <name/Adam Hudson/, and was first used in his <name/QuickBBS/ package. Later several other <abbr/BBS/'es were cloned from <name/QuickBBS/ (like <name/RemoteAccess/ and <name/SuperBBS/). </p> <p> The format limits the total size of <code/msgtxt.bbs/ to a maximum of 16MB, which translates to about 16000 msgs of <q/average/ length. <name/GoldED+/ automatically warns you if the limit is close to being reached, and advises you to pack the messagebase. </p> <p> The first incarnations of <name/QuickBBS/ did not support <q/sharing/ of the msgbase. This became more and more important in later years as multitaskers and networks got cheaper. <name/RemoteAccess/ <abbr/BBS/ was the first to implement a useful method, and later a better method was evolved (known as <name/RA/ 1.01 or <name/RA/ 1.1x), which is now the standard for all modern software that supports msgbase sharing. <name/GoldED+/ fully supports the new standard of course. </p> <p> The main virtue of this format is that it is very fast to access the msgbase. </p> <p> The main disadvantage is that it can be very sensitive to disk problems, and it is a common horror story that people loose their entire msgbase because the disk developed bad clusters or some program went berserk and messed up the msgbase files. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Goldbase </head> <p> This is an enhanced version of the <name/Hudson/ format, introduced in <name/QuickBBS/ 2.80 by the <name/QuickBBS/ group. </p> <p> The <name/Goldbase/ format removes the 16MB size limit and allows up to 500 message areas instead of the 200 in <name/Hudson/. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Squish </head> <p> The <name/Squish/ format was invented by <name/Maximus/ <abbr/BBS/ author <name/Scott Dudley/ in 1991, and was first used in <name/Maximus CBCS/ v2.00. </p> <p> The use of a database for each area - instead of one file per msg, or all msgs in one big database - makes this format fast, very safe and resistant to disk problems. Even if something messed up a <name/Squish/ area, it can almost always be fixed and recovered, using the <name/SQFIX/ or <name/SQREIDX/ utilities that come with the <name/Squish/ echomail processor. </p> <p> A special feature of <name/Squish/ areas is that they can be self-maintaining. You can setup a <name/Squish/ area so that it may only contain a maximum of so-and-so many msgs, and then it will automatically re-use the space used by old msgs when the limit is reached, and so it will practically stop growing. It will still need packing, but not nearly as often as a <name/Hudson/ msgbase has to. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Ezycom </head> <p> <name/Ezycom/ format is supported by <name/GoldED+/. Status is not known. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> JAM </head> <p> <name/JAM/ format as defined in the <name/JAM(mbp)/ revision 001. Also <name/CrashMail/, <name/CrashEcho/, and <name/SMAPI/ (<name/HPT/) highwater marks are supported. </p> <p> <name/GoldED+/ currently ignores revision number of header structure and assumes that future revisions will remain backward compatible. When creating new msgs, <name/GoldED+/ uses the revision 1 header structure. </p> <p> <name/GoldED+/ currently doesn't support passwords to access the message base and/or indiviual messages. When creating a new <name/JAM/ msgbase and/or new <name/JAM/ msgs, <name/GoldED+/ sets the password to FFFFFFFFh. If you change an existing message which has a password, the password is <hi/NOT/ preserved, but reset to FFFFFFFFh. </p> <p> The <name/JAM/ lastread file is designed such that is has to be searched for a user ID/CRC, because one cannot assume that the records are in a specific order. The <name/JAM/ <abbr/API/ searches the userid field. However <name/GoldED+/ searches for the user CRC, not the user ID. In any case, it seems that <name/RemoteAccess/ 2.x sets both the user ID and CRC to the same value. </p> <p> <name/GoldED+/ currently doesn't support the escaping described in the <name/JAM/ specs. The specs state that the current revision of <name/JAM/ does not support it either, so it seems to be not great loss. </p> <p> <name/GoldED+/ does not supports the following <name/JAM/ subfields: <q/Force pickup/, and <q>Msg may not be displayed to user</q> (always displayed). </p> <p> <name/GoldED+/ optionally may use tricky method invented by <name/Odinn/ and aprooved by the <name/JAM/ developers when deleting messages. The configuration keyword <ref target=JAMHARDDELETE><kw/JAMHARDDELETE/</ref> specifies which method to use. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> PCBoard </head> <p> The supported <name/PCBoard/ messagebase corresponds to the v15.x of <name/PCBoard/ <abbr/BBS/. </p> <p> <name/GoldED+/ is aware of <name/PCBoard/ v15.x extended headers in the message text. The <gi/TO/, <gi/TO2/, <gi/FROM/, <gi/FROM2/ and <gi/SUBJECT/ extended headers are directly supported and <q/swallowed/ when reading a message. Other extended headers are currently treated like normal message text and is therefore not hidden to the reader. </p> <p> Passwords are not supported. </p> <p> The <gi/Private/, <gi/Received/, <gi/Crash/, and <gi/Direct/ attributes are supported. </p> <p> <name/GoldED+/ reads the <code/pcboard.dat/ file to determine whether to use E3h or 0Dh (<gi/CR/) as the line/paragraph termination character when reading and writing message text. </p> <p> The mail waiting flags are updated when you write to people that are named in the userbase. </p> <p> When changing a message, the new edition is saved as if it were a new message, with a new message number, and then the old edition is deleted. This behaviour is consistent with the way <name/PCBoard/ itself works when changing a message. The old edition will still exist with the <gi/DEL/ attribute. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> AdeptXBBS </head> <p> The implementation is based on the documentation in version 1.05, experimentation and questions to the authors. Thanks go to <name/Frank Jacobberger/ for the initial testing and prodding of the authors to answer <name/Odinns/ questions. </p> <p> The <name/AdeptXBBS/ format does not have a quick method of finding deleted messages via the index file. This means that deleted messages left in the messagebase marked with the <gi/DEL/ attribute. </p> <p> Mixing of netmail and echomail or other types of mail in the same area is not directly supported. If an area is setup as both netmail and echomail, <name/GoldED+/ will treat it as netmail. If an area is neither netmail nor echomail, <name/GoldED+/ wil treat it as a local area. </p> <p> <name/GoldED+/ detects <name/Usenet/ (newsgroup) and <name/Internet/ e-mail areas in the <name/AdeptXBBS/ setup and uses them as such, but it has not yet been tested if <name/GoldED+/ and <name/AdeptXBBS/ are compatible in the way they store and process <name/Internet/ header information. </p> <p> The <name/AdeptXBBS/ personal mail feature (the index in the <code/Personal_Mail/ directory) is supported for mails you write to other users on the <abbr/BBS/. However, personal mail for you via this feature or by other means is not yet supported. </p> <p> The replylinking method used by <name/AdeptXBBS/ (whatever the method is??!) is not yet supported. This means that links to other messages are missing. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> WildCat! </head> <p> The <name/WildCat!/ 4.x format does not have a quick method of finding deleted messages via the index file. This means that deleted messages left in the messagebase marked with the <gi/DEL/ attribute. </p> <p> WildCat features which are not supported yet: <list type=simple> <item/The userbase./ <item/The message unread chain./ <item>The message from/to title.</item> <item/The message network name./ <item/The message internal and external attach./ </list> </p> <p> There is a keyword <ref target=WILDCATUSERNO><kw/WILDCATUSERNO/</ref>, which works just like the other <kw><msgbase>USERNO</kw> keywords. By default <name/GoldED+/ will use the first record in the lastread file (<code/*.lrd/), so if you are not the first person in the userbase, or you are sharing the messagebase with others, you may have to change this user number. The userbase is currently not supported (i.e.: you can't set the number to -1 to let <name/GoldED+/ find the correct user and lastread automatically). </p> <p> <hi/Note/: The <name/WildCat!/ support is currently not very well-tested, so use it with caution. Limited testing shown that <name/GoldED+/ not damages the messagebases, but you should probably test it on less important areas and/or make backups until it is determined that it is safe. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Synchronet </head> <p> <name/Synchronet/ message base as described in <name>Synchronet Message Base Specification</name> version 1.21. <name/GoldED+/ currently linked with <name/SMBLib/ taken from the <name/Synchronet/ <abbr/BBS/ sources slightly adopted to the <name/GoldED+/ internal definitions. </p> <p> Just like <name/WildCat!/ format, <name/Synchronet/ format does not have a quick method of finding deleted messages via the index file. This means that deleted messages left in the messagebase marked with the <gi/DEL/ attribute. </p> <p> <hi/Note/: The <name/Synchronet/ support is currently not tested at all. </p> </div2> </div1> <!-- --------------------------------------------------------------------- --> <div1> <head> Nodelist and Userlist Support </head> <p> <name/GoldED+/ supports the <name/FrontDoor/, <name/Version 7(+)/ nodelist indexes as well as a plain <code/fidouser.lst/. However, if you run software that doesn't use any of these formats, you may want to use <name/GoldED+/'s own nodelist index. </p> <p> In order to enable nodelist/userlist lookup and browsing, <name/GoldED+/ needs to use a set of special nodelist index files, created by the <name/GoldNODE/ nodelist compiler. </p> <p> <name/GoldED+/ normally uses and displays information from the nodelist when browsing, but it doesn't really need the nodelist for anything. The index files contains sufficient information for lookup and browsing of names or addresses. This means that you can delete or pack away the nodelists and/or userlists after compiling with <name/GoldNODE/, if you want to save space and you don't need them for anything else. </p> </div1> <div1> <head> Routing Diagram Drawing Tool </head> <p> Routing diagram drawing tool intended to analyse files created by pressing key defined for <!-- FIX ME!!! --> <kw>READmakepathreport</kw> action. <name/RDDT/ builds routing tree and display it on the screen if requested. </p> </div1> <!-- --------------------------------------------------------------------- --> <div1 id=COMMANDLINE> <head> Commandline Reference </head> <div2> <head> Mail Reader Commandline Syntax </head> <p> Invocation:<eg> golded [options] [keystacking]</eg> </p> <p> Depending on used platform <name>GoldED+</name> could be called <code>geddjg</code>, <code>gedcyg</code>, <code>gedemx</code>, or <code>gedlnx</code>. Available options are (all options are case insensitive): <list type=gloss> <label> <code>-?</code> </label> <item> Displays a help screen with all available commandline options. </item> <label> <code>-c<configname></code> </label> <item> Specifies another configuration file than the default. See also <ref target=GOLDED><kw/GOLDED/</ref> environment variable. </item> <label> <code>-d</code> </label> <item> Disable old configuration keywords. For backward compatibility, <name>GoldED+</name> still supports a number of old names for some configuration keywords. It is recommended that you use <code>-d</code> sometimes and rename the keywords that are reported as unknown. </item> <label> <code>-e<echoid></code> </label> <item> If specified, <name>GoldED+</name> starts directly in the specified echo, bypassing the arealist screen. See the <ref target=AREASTART><kw>AREASTART</kw></ref> configuration keyword for more info. </item> <label> <code>-exportsoup</code> </label> <item> Calls the <name>SOUP</name> packet export feature during the startup phase. This is the same as starting it from the areascan <code>SOUP Packet->Export</code> menu item. The <name>SOUP</name> export happens immediately after the regular startup area scanning (if that is enabled) and after <name>SOUP</name> import. </item> <label> <code>-f</code> </label> <item> Force recompile of most configuration files, but not all. Does not recompile the <code>*.chs</code> files. </item> <label> <code>-ff</code> </label> <item> Force complete recompile of all configuration files, regardless of whether they are up-to-date or not. This is equivalent to deleting all the <code>*.ge?</code> files. </item> <label> <code>-h</code> </label> <item> Same as option <code>-?</code>. </item> <label> <code>-install[=path]</code> </label> <item> Start the quick install procedure. You should give a path to your other mail software if it cannot be found using environment variables or in current directory. </item> <label> <code>-importsoup</code> </label> <item> Calls the <name>SOUP</name> packet import feature during the startup phase. This is the same as starting it from the areascan <code>SOUP Packet->Import</code> menu item. The <name>SOUP</name> import happens immediately after the regular startup area scanning (if that is enabled). </item> <label> <code/-m/ </label> <item> Mute. Disables all sounds in <name/GoldED+/. The same functionality provided by the <ref target=BEEPNOISES><kw/BEEPNOISES/</ref> keyword in the configuration file. </item> <label> <code>-n</code> </label> <item> No share. If used, this prevents <name>GoldED+</name> from using <code>SHARE</code> compatible file-open calls, which are used by default. Works only until the <ref target=SHAREMODE><kw>SHAREMODE</kw></ref> keyword is used in the configuration file. This keyword is normally not useful, but may be used to debug your setup or something. </item> <label> <code>-noscan</code> </label> <item> Disable the automatic startup area scanning (if that is enabled). This is useful for automated <abbr>SOUP</abbr> import/export in a batch file. For example,<eg> golded -noscan -importsoup @x y</eg> imports <name>SOUP</name> then exits. </item> <label> <code>-p</code> </label> <item> Since it seems that increasing the thread priority for the <name/Win32/ version is a mixed blessing, the default is to <hi/not/ increase the priority. From other side <name>OS/2</name> version runned with reduced priority by default. This option increases the priority (<name/Win32/ and <name>OS/2</name> only). </item> <label> <code>-q</code> </label> <item> Quiet. Turns off verbose config compile. On by default. This could be used on the commandline to disable a <code>-v</code> option in the <ref target=GEDCMD><kw/GEDCMD/</ref> environment variable. </item> <label> <code>-s<sortspec></code> </label> <item> Sort all areas according to <ident>sortspec</ident>. See the <ref target=AREALISTSORT><kw/AREALISTSORT/</ref> config keyword for details. </item> <label> <code>-t<seconds></code> </label> <item> Set the timeout value. A value of zero (0) means never timeout. See the <ref target=TIMEOUT><kw/TIMEOUT/</ref> config keyword for details. </item> <label> <code>-v</code> </label> <item> Turns on verbose config compile. When used, <name>GoldED+</name> will display the full filename of each main config file it compiles. It also displays the name of the detected multitasker, if any. This can be useful for debugging your setup, and see if <name>GoldED+</name> accesses the files (especially the <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref>'s) it is supposed to. </item> <label> <code>-vv</code> </label> <item> Same as <code>-v</code>, but also displays all the active lines while compiling. This could be used to find the exact spot if it crashes or stops while compiling. </item> <label> <code>-w</code> </label> <item> If used, <name/GoldED+/ will create (and overwrite if existing) the file <code/goldarea.inc/, which will then contain all areas in the <ref target=AREADEF><kw/AREADEF/</ref> form, sorted by your <ref target=AREALISTSORT><kw/AREALISTSORT/</ref> specification. This is very useful for converting your <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref>'s to a form you can edit with your favorite text editor and use in <name/GoldED+/. It is also useful if you have used the new <ref target=AREADESC><kw/AREADESC/</ref> keyword or the <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref> <ref target=ECHOLIST><gi/EchoList/</ref> reader. The <code>goldarea.inc</code> file (created in the <ref target=GOLDPATH><kw/GOLDPATH/</ref>) can be used by adding<eg> INCLUDE goldarea.inc</eg> to your configuration files. When creating the file, <name/GoldED+/ will use <q/./ if an aka is the same as the main aka, and leave out the optional origin if it's the same as the first <ref target=ORIGIN><kw/ORIGIN/</ref> in your configuration files. This makes it easier to share the same <code/goldarea.inc/ between different setups. </item> <label> <code>-x</code> </label> <item> Reserved for debugging purposes. </item> <label> <code>-y</code> </label> <item> Reserved for debugging purposes. </item> <label> <code>-z</code> </label> <item> Reserved for debugging purposes. </item> </list> </p> <p> Any non-option characters on the commandline are stuffed into the keyboard buffer. See the chapter on keyboard definition and the <ref target=KEYBSTACK><kw>KEYBSTACK</kw></ref> keyword for more info. </p> <p> For example,<eg> golded @S A</eg> makes <name>GoldED+</name> go to the area scanning menu <Alt-S>, and select scanning of <A> all areas. </p> <p> See the <ptr target=MACROSANDKEYSTACKING> chapter for more info. Note, that only those combinations described in the <ref target=KEYBSTACK><kw>KEYBSTACK</kw></ref> chapter are allowed here. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> <name/GoldED+/ Batchfile Errorlevels </head> <p> For operation in batch files, <name>GoldED+</name> has a set of errorlevel values: <table rows=5 cols=2> <row> <cell> 032 or higher </cell> <cell> Error exit (check the logfile for details). </cell> </row> <row> <cell> 004 </cell> <cell> Echomail entered. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> 002 </cell> <cell> Netmail entered. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> 001 </cell> <cell> Local mail entered. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> 000 </cell> <cell> No errors. No mail entered. </cell> </row> </table> </p> <p> Add values together to find the combined error levels. For example, error level 6 is returned if netmail and echomail (2+4) was entered. </p> <p> Example of <code>rungold.bat</code> file:<eg> golded.exe if errorlevel 007 goto e_n_l if errorlevel 006 goto e_n__ if errorlevel 005 goto e___l if errorlevel 004 goto e____ if errorlevel 003 goto __n_l if errorlevel 002 goto __n__ if errorlevel 001 goto ____l if errorlevel 000 goto nomail :error echo GoldED+ error exit! goto end :e_n_l echo **** New echo, net and local mail entered. goto end :e_n__ echo **** New echo and netmail entered. goto end :e___l echo **** New echo and local mail entered. goto end :e____ echo **** New echomail entered. goto end :__n_l echo **** New net and local mail entered. goto end :__n__ echo **** New netmail entered. goto end :____l echo **** New local mail entered. goto end :nomail echo **** No new mail entered. :end echo. echo Thank you for using GoldED+! :-)</eg> </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Nodelist Compiler Commandline Syntax </head> <p> Invocation:<eg> goldnode [options] [configfile]</eg> </p> <p> Depending on used platform <name>GoldNODE</name> could be called <code>gndjg</code>, <code>gncyg</code>, <code>gnemx</code>, or <code>gnlnx</code>. Available options: <list type=gloss> <label> <code>-c</code> </label> <item> Conditional compile. </item> <label> <code>-d</code> </label> <item> Remove duplicate nodes from index. </item> <label> <code>-f</code> </label> <item> Forced compile. </item> <label> <code>-q</code> </label> <item> Quite compiled. No screen output improves speed. </item> <label> <code>-s<size></code> </label> <item> Set the max size of names. Normally not used. </item> <label> <code>-u<file></code> </label> <item> Create sorted <code/fidouser.lst/ userlist file. </item> </list> </p> <p> The <ident/configfile/ is the path and filename of the configuration file to read. If no filename is given and it could not be found by using environment variables then current path is used. See also <ref target=GOLDNODE><kw/GOLDNODE/</ref> and <ref target=GOLDED><kw/GOLDED/</ref> environment variables. </p> <p> The nodelist index files are named <code/goldnode.gx?/ are are placed in the path pointed to by the <ref target=NODEPATH><kw/NODEPATH/</ref> keyword. </p> <p> The <name>V7+</name> index is automatically used if your <ref target=NODEPATHV7><kw/NODEPATHV7/</ref> is set correctly. If <name/GoldED+/ shows<eg> xxxx / nodex.dtp</eg> at the bottom of the browser window, the displayed information is taken from the raw nodelist entry, taken from the <name>V7+</name> index. </p> <p> <name>GoldNODE</name> can read the german <name>POINTS24</name>-format directly! </p> <p> <hi/NOTE/: If you use the <ref target=EXCLUDENODES><kw/EXCLUDENODES/</ref> and <ref target=INCLUDENODES><kw/INCLUDENODES/</ref> keywords, please note that the <ident>addressmask<ident> does <hi>not</hi> accept <q/ALL/ or <q/WORLD/, etc. You must use wildcard <q/*/ instead. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Routing Diagram Drawing Tool Commandline Syntax </head> <p> Invocation:<eg> rddt <routefile> [options] [address or name]</eg> </p> <p> Depending on used platform <name>RDDT</name> could be called <code>rddtdjg</code>, <code>rddtcyg</code>, <code>rddtemx</code>, or <code>rddtlnx</code>. Available options: <list type=gloss> <label> <code>-d</code> </label> <item> Reserved for debugging purposes. </item> <label> <code>-i<n></code> </label> <item> Sets indent to <ident>n</ident>. </item> <label> <code>-l<link address></code> </label> <item> This option used to specify yours link address. Requires option <code>-n</code>. </item> <label> <code>-n<address></code> </label> <item> Use this option to specify your address. </item> <label> <code>-p</code> </label> <item> Decode path. </item> </list> </p> <p> Example:<eg> RDDT path.rpt -n2:5020/604.19 -l2:5020/604 2:5020/604.19 -p</eg> </p> </div2> </div1> <!-- --------------------------------------------------------------------- --> <div1> <head> Environment Variables </head> <p> These are the <name>GoldED+</name> specific environment variables: <list type=gloss> <label id=GOLDED> <kw/GOLDED/, <kw/GED/ </label> <item> Path to the <code/golded.cfg/ configuration file. Note, that <name/Win32/ version tries to open <code/gedw32.cfg/ first, and <name>OS/2</name> version tries to open <code/ged2.cfg/ first. You may specify path <hi/and/ filename of configuration file here. It is recommended to set this variable, but don't forget to change it if you move your <name>GoldED+</name> setup to a different directory! </item> <label> <kw/GED2/ </label> <item> Same as above, but for <name>OS/2</name> version only. </item> <label> <kw/GEDW32/ </label> <item> Same as above, but for <name/Win32/ version only. </item> <label id=GEDCMD> <kw/GEDCMD/ </label> <item> Specifies additional commandline options. Use this if you want to specify options, but need to run <name>GoldED</name> without them (for example when renaming <code>GOLDED.EXE</code> to <code>DBEDIT.EXE</code> in older versions of <name>D'Bridge</name>). You can override the environment options with commandline options. </item> <label id=GOLDNODE> <kw/GOLDNODE/ </label> <item> The path where <name/GoldNODE/ can find a configuration file to use. See also <ref target=GOLDED><kw/GOLDED/</ref> environment variable. </item> <label> <kw/MAXIMUS/, <kw/SQUISH/ </label> <item> If <ref target=SQUISHUSERPATH><kw/SQUISHUSERPATH/</ref> is not defined in the configuration file then value of these variables are used. </item> <label> <kw/FD/ </label> <item> Path where <code/names.fd/ could be found if not explicitly defined by the <ref target=NAMESFILE><kw/NAMESFILE/</ref> keyword. </item> <label> <kw/ESCDELAY/ </label> <item> This variable is only used by <name/Linux/ and <name/FreeBSD/ versions compiled with <name/ncurses/ support. See <name/ncurses/ reference for details. If not devined then default value <q/50/ is used. </item> </list> </p> <p> When using the <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref> feature to read external area configuration from the other programs, the individual <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref>'s may use specific environment variables to find the files. Please read the <ptr target=AREACONFIGURATION> chapter for specific details of each supported <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref>. </p> </div1> <!-- --------------------------------------------------------------------- --> <div1> <head> Configuration Keyword Reference </head> <p> The following special symbols are used in the keyword parameter lists: <table rows=6 cols=2> <row> <cell> <ident>[]</ident> </cell> <cell> Optional parameter. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident><></ident> </cell> <cell> Required parameter, not optional. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <q></q> </cell> <cell> Parameter must be inclosed in quotes. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident>/</ident> </cell> <cell> Separates mutually exclusive values. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident>,</ident> </cell> <cell> Separates possible values for the keyword. </cell> </row> </table> </p> <p> There's no mandatory keywords but the mail reader should have defined at least name, address and area; nodelist compiler should have address and either nodelist or userlist defined. </p> <p> Whenever path is expected you may use environment variables enclosed in percent signs, f.e. <code>%FIDO%/myfile.txt</code>. This also valid for input prompts where path is expected :-) </p> <div2 id=REM> <head> Remarks </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/REM/ <ident/[text]/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Signifies a remark (comment) line. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The <ident/text/ contains remark line. The line is ignored. </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> Any non-alphabetic non-whitespace character at the beginning of a line makes the line a comment. By tradition, the semicolon is the standard comment character. The semicolon (and only that) can also be used to add a comment at the end of a configuration line. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader and nodelist compiler. </item> <label> Example: </label> <item><eg> REM This is a comment ; This is a comment % This is a comment * This is a comment // This is a comment /* This is a comment */ ADDRESS 2:236/77 ; Main address. AKA 2:236/77.1 ; SysOp point.</eg> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=CONDITIONALS> <head> Conditionals </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/IF/ <ident/<condition>/<lb> <kw/ELIF/ <ident/<condition>/<lb> <kw/ELSEIF/ <ident/<condition>/<lb> <kw/ELSE/<lb> <kw/ENDIF/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> These control keywords can be used to setup sections of configuration which enable different sets of keywords depending on which version that is used. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The following conditions can be used: <table rows=8 cols=2> <row> <cell> <ident/DOS/, <ident/386/, <ident/DPMI32/ </cell> <cell> true, if <name>DPMI32</name> version is used </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident>OS/2</ident>, <ident/OS2/ </cell> <cell> true, if <name>OS/2</name> version is used </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/WIN32/, <ident/W32/, <ident/NT/ </cell> <cell> true, if <name>Win32</name> version is used </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident>Linux, UNIX</ident> </cell> <cell> true, if <name/Linux/ or <name/FreeBSD/ version is used </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident>Firebird</ident> </cell> <cell> true, if <name/GoldED/ 3.xx or <name/GoldED+/ is used </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident>ASA</ident> </cell> <cell> true, if <name/GoldED-asa/ or <name/GoldED+/ is used </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident>Yes</ident>, <ident>True</ident>, <ident>On</ident> </cell> <cell> always true </cell> </row> </table> </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader and nodelist compiler. </item> <label> Example: </label> <item><eg> IF OS2 EDITOR c:\qedit\os2\q.exe @file -n@line EDITSPELLCHECK c:\os2\cmd.exe /c c:\ss\ss.exe @file ELIF DOS EDITOR c:\qedit\dos\q.exe @file -n@line EDITSPELLCHECK c:\ss\ss.exe @file ELIF WIN32 EDITOR c:\progra~1\far\far.exe -i -e@line @file EDITSPELLCHECK c:\fido\goldkorr\goldkorr.exe @file /A /Q ENDIF</eg> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=IGNORE> <head> IGNORE </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/IGNORE/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This tells the configuration file reader to ignore all subsequent lines until another <kw/IGNORE/ or <kw/IF/ keyword is encountered. Useful for testing and quickly switching portions of configuration. However it is probably more useful to use the <ref target=CONDITIONALS/conditionals/ control keywords. </item> <label> Bugs: </label> <item> This keyword may cause unpredicable results if used within <ref target=CONDITIONALS/conditionals/ control keywords. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=CONDITIONALS/Conditionals/ </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=ADDRESS> <head> ADDRESS </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/ADDRESS/ <ident><zone:net/node[.point][@domain] [,pointnet]></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Your network address, <name/FidoNet/-style. More than one address can be specified if you are member of more than one network. The keywords <kw/ADDRESS/ and <ref target=AKA><kw/AKA/</ref> can be used interchangeably. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If a <ident/pointnet/ is specified with a point address, <name/GoldED+/ will use the so-called <term/3D/ addressing method in netmail msgs, otherwise the <term/4D/ method is used. The <term/3D/ method works by putting the address <ident>zone:pointnet/point.0</ident> in the msg header, instead of the <term/4D/ format <ident>zone:net/node.point</ident>. Most modern mailers and mail processors now supports the <term/4D/ format, but if you are a point, you should always consult your boss about which format to use.<lb> The optional <ident/@domain/ part can be used to specify a <term/fifth/ dimension to the <term/4D/ address. It is normally not necessary to specify a domain. Domains are never shown in the header. </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> This keyword can be used globally and in a <ref target=RANDOMSYSTEM>Random System</ref> group. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader and nodelist compiler. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AKA><kw/AKA/</ref>, <ref target=NETNAME><kw/NETNAME/</ref> </item> <label> Example: </label> <item><eg> ADDRESS 2:236/77 ; Node address ADDRESS 2:236/77.1 ; Point address (4D) ADDRESS 2:236/77.1, 16077 ; Point address (3D) ADDRESS 2:236/77@fidonet ; Node address with domain</eg> </item> </list> </div2> <div2> <head> ADDRESSBOOKADD </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/ADDRESSBOOKADD/ <ident><YES/NO/ALWAYS></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls whether <name/GoldED+/ will add unknown addressees into the addressbook when writing new or quoted mails. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> Setting this keyword to <ident/ALWAYS/ means that <name/GoldED+/ will always add unknown addressees to the addressbook when writing new or quoted mails automatically. If you set the value to <ident/YES/, <name/GoldED+/ will add them only if it's a netmail/email. Setting to <ident/NO/ disables this feature entirely. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> <name/GoldED+/ won't add unknown users if their name match one of the following criterias: <list type=simple> <item> It's a <ref target=ROBOTNAME><kw/ROBOTNAME/</ref> </item> <item> It's a <ref target=USERNAME><kw/USERNAME/</ref> </item> <item> It's the <ref target=WHOTO><kw/WHOTO/</ref> </item> <item> It's the mailinglist's sender address </item> <item> It's an UUCP </item> <item> It's already an email address </item> <item> Address/aka is unknown </item> <item> It's an <ref target=ADDRESSMACRO><kw/ADDRESSMACRO/</ref> </item> </list> </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=ADDRESSMACRO><kw/ADDRESSMACRO/</ref>, <ref target=INTERNETGATE><kw/INTERNETGATE/</ref>, <ref target=MAILINGLIST><kw/MAILINGLIST/</ref>, <ref target=ROBOTNAME><kw/ROBOTNAME/</ref>, <ref target=USERNAME><kw/USERNAME/</ref>, <ref target=WHOTO><kw/WHOTO/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2> <head> ADDRESSLOOKUPFIRST </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/ADDRESSLOOKUPFIRST/ <ident><MSGID/ORIGIN></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword defines the first source to lookup address. If valid address could not be found in the specifyed location then second source is used. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If defined to <ident/ORIGIN/ then address of sender taken from <gi/Origin/ line. If this keyword set to <ident/MSGID/ then <name/GoldED+/ looks for correct <abbr/FTN/ address in <gi/MSGID/ kludge first. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/ORIGIN/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=ADDRESSMACRO> <head> ADDRESSMACRO </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/ADDRESSMACRO/ <ident/<macro>, <name>, <address> [,<q>subject</q>] [,attribs]/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Defines a short name for often used addresses. Typical uses are for <name/AreaFix//<name/AreaMgr/, your uplink, boss, points or others you write to often. To use a defined address macro, you just type it in the <gi/To:/ name field. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If (and <hi>only</hi> if) the subject is enclosed in quotes (<q// or ''), <name/GoldED+/ will look for message attributes after the <ident/subject/ field. See the <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> for the valid attributes. You cannot have quotes within quotes (not the same type anyway). The attribues are <hi/added/ to the ones already there, they do <hi/not/ replace them.<lb> A special format is supported for <abbr/UUCP/ or <name/Internet/ gateways. The special format is indicated with a <q/@/ as the first character in the <ident/name/ field. You may specify <name/Internet/ gate name here if it other then default specifyed with <ref target=INTERNETGATE><kw/INTERNETGATE/</ref> keyword, just put gate name right after the <q/@/ and terminate it with the slash (<q>/</q>). </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> The address macros can also be specified in an external file, like the <code/names.fd/ file supported by the <name/FrontDoor/ mailer/editor and <name/Maximus/ <abbr/BBS/. See the keyword <ref target=NAMESFILE><kw/NAMESFILE/</ref> for details. However, you should not use the syntax with the attributes in the <code/names.fd/ file, because <name/FrontDoor/ and <name/Maximus/ do not know this syntax.<lb> When used in the <name/Internet/ area, <q/@/ as the first character in the <ident/name/ field may be omitted. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=INTERNETGATE><kw/INTERNETGATE/</ref>, <ref target=NAMESFILE><kw/NAMESFILE/</ref> </item> <label> Examples: </label> <item><eg><![ CDATA [ ADDRESSMACRO afup,AreaFix,2:236/512,"password -q -l",K/S ADDRESSMACRO ffup,FileFix,2:236/512,password ADDRESSMACRO odin,Odinn Sorensen,2:236/77,GoldED - What else? :-) ADDRESSMACRO jfu,@fallesen@diku.dk,2:310/33 ADDRESSMACRO vp,@vasya@pupkin.ru (Vasya Pupkin),2:5020/128 ADDRESSMACRO dn,@INTERNET/david@csource.oz.au,2:241/999]]></eg> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=ADEPTXBBSPATH> <head> ADEPTXBBSPATH </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/ADEPTXBBSPATH/ <ident/<path>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Specifyes the path where you keep your <name/AdeptXBBS/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The <ident/path/ where you keep your <name/AdeptXBBS/. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ptr target=AREACONFIGURATION> chapter, <ref target=ADEPTXBBSUSERNO><kw/ADEPTXBBSUSERNO/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=ADEPTXBBSUSERNO> <head> ADEPTXBBSUSERNO </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/ADEPTXBBSUSERNO/ <ident/<userno>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Specifyes the record number in the userfile and lastreads. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If you are not the first user in the userfile, or are sharing the messagebase with other <name/GoldED+/ users, you must either set this keyword to -1, or use a different number for each user. Each user must be defined in the userbase. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> By default <name/GoldED+/ will use the first record in the userfile and lastreads. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ptr target=AREACONFIGURATION> chapter, <ref target=ADEPTXBBSPATH><kw/ADEPTXBBSPATH/</ref>, <ref target=EZYCOMUSERNO><kw/EZYCOMUSERNO/</ref>, <ref target=FIDOUSERNO><kw/FIDOUSERNO/</ref>, <ref target=GOLDBASEUSERNO><kw/GOLDBASEUSERNO/</ref>, <ref target=HUDSONUSERNO><kw/HUDSONUSERNO/</ref>, <ref target=PCBOARDUSERNO><kw/PCBOARDUSERNO/</ref>, <ref target=SQUISHUSERNO><kw/SQUISHUSERNO/</ref>, <ref target=WILDCATUSERNO><kw/WILDCATUSERNO/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AKA> <head> AKA </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AKA/ <ident><zone:net/node[.point][@domain] [,pointnet]></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Your network address, <name/FidoNet/-style. More than one address can be specified if you are member of more than one network. The keywords <ref target=ADDRESS><kw/ADDRESS/</ref> and <kw/AKA/ can be used interchangeably. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If a <ident/pointnet/ is specified with a point address, <name/GoldED+/ will use the so-called <term/3D/ addressing method in netmail msgs, otherwise the <term/4D/ method is used. The <term/3D/ method works by putting the address <ident>zone:pointnet/point.0</ident> in the msg header, instead of the <term/4D/ format <ident>zone:net/node.point</ident>. Most modern mailers and mail processors now supports the <term/4D/ format, but if you are a point, you should always consult your boss about which format to use.<lb> The optional <ident/@domain/ part can be used to specify a <term/fifth/ dimension to the <term/4D/ address. It is normally not necessary to specify a domain. Domains are never shown in the header. </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> This keyword can be used globally and in a <ref target=RANDOMSYSTEM>Random System</ref> group. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader and nodelist compiler. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=ADDRESS><kw/ADDRESS/</ref>, <ref target=NETNAME><kw/NETNAME/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AKAMATCH> <head> AKAMATCH </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AKAMATCH/ <ident/<pattern> <aka>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This is an enhancement of the existing aka matching logic, which in some circumstances fails to find the correct aka. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If the destination address matches <ident/pattern/ then <name/GoldED+/ will use <ident/aka/ specifyed instead of default best-match rule. All patterns are checked in the order they follow in the configuration files.<lb> Wildcards are not strictly necessary in the match <ident/pattern/, you could write f.e. <q>zone:*/*.*</q> or <q>zone:</q>, etc. </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> When an address does not match any <kw>AKAMATCH</kw> definition, the normal aka matching logic takes over. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AKAMATCHECHO><kw/AKAMATCHECHO/</ref>, <ref target=AKAMATCHING><kw/AKAMATCHING/</ref>, <ref target=AKAMATCHLOCAL><kw/AKAMATCHLOCAL/</ref>, <ref target=AKAMATCHNET><kw/AKAMATCHNET/</ref> </item> <label> Example: </label> <item><eg> ADDRESS 2:236/77 ; this is primary address AKA 22:33/44 ; this address valid for zones 21:, 22:, and 23 AKAMATCH 21:*/*.* 22:33/44 AKAMATCH 23: 22:33/44</eg> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AKAMATCHECHO> <head> AKAMATCHECHO </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AKAMATCHECHO/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls whether <name/GoldED+/ should do akamatching in echomail areas. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/YES/, <name/GoldED+/ will attempt to match one of your akas to the address of the person you are replying to in echomail areas. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/NO/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> Normally it is not desirable to enable aka matching in echomail, because some echoes may be restricted to members of one particular network, and an accidental wrong aka matching may attract unwanted attention from the moderator or the compulsive flamers :-) </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AKAMATCH><kw/AKAMATCH/</ref>, <ref target=AKAMATCHING><kw/AKAMATCHING/</ref>, <ref target=AKAMATCHLOCAL><kw/AKAMATCHLOCAL/</ref>, <ref target=AKAMATCHNET><kw/AKAMATCHNET/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AKAMATCHING> <head> AKAMATCHING </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AKAMATCHING/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls whether <name/GoldED+/ should do akamatching in areas within <ref target=RANDOMSYSTEM>Random System</ref> group it is defined. When used, it overrides any global <ref target=AKAMATCHECHO><kw/AKAMATCHECHO/</ref>, <ref target=AKAMATCHLOCAL><kw/AKAMATCHLOCAL/</ref>, or <ref target=AKAMATCHNET><kw/AKAMATCHNET/</ref> you may have. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/YES/, <name/GoldED+/ will attempt to match one of your akas to the address of the person you are replying to. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/NO/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> This keyword is valid <hi/ONLY/ in a <ref target=RANDOMSYSTEM>Random System</ref> group. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AKAMATCH><kw/AKAMATCH/</ref>, <ref target=AKAMATCHING><kw/AKAMATCHING/</ref>, <ref target=AKAMATCHLOCAL><kw/AKAMATCHLOCAL/</ref>, <ref target=AKAMATCHNET><kw/AKAMATCHNET/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AKAMATCHLOCAL> <head> AKAMATCHLOCAL </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AKAMATCHLOCAL/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls whether <name/GoldED+/ should do akamatching in local areas. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/YES/, <name/GoldED+/ will attempt to match one of your akas to the address of the person you are replying to in local areas. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/NO/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> It doesn't really make sense to do aka matching in local areas. The keyword is just there for completeness. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AKAMATCH><kw/AKAMATCH/</ref>, <ref target=AKAMATCHECHO><kw/AKAMATCHECHO/</ref>, <ref target=AKAMATCHING><kw/AKAMATCHING/</ref>, <ref target=AKAMATCHNET><kw/AKAMATCHNET/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AKAMATCHNET> <head> AKAMATCHNET </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AKAMATCHNET/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls whether <name/GoldED+/ should do akamatching in netmail areas. This is especially useful if you are a member in more than one network, and therefore have more than one address. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/YES/, <name/GoldED+/ will attempt to match one of your akas to the address of the person you are replying to in netmail areas. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> Normally it is not desirable to enable aka matching in echomail, because some echoes may be restricted to members of one particular network, and an accidental wrong aka matching may attract unwanted attention from the moderator or the compulsive flamers :-) </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AKAMATCH><kw/AKAMATCH/</ref>, <ref target=AKAMATCHECHO><kw/AKAMATCHECHO/</ref>, <ref target=AKAMATCHING><kw/AKAMATCHING/</ref>, <ref target=AKAMATCHLOCAL><kw/AKAMATCHLOCAL/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2> <head> APP </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/APP/ <ident><programname> [text]</ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword provides a way for other programs to place configuration data in <name/GoldED+/'s configuration file. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The <ident/programname/ parameter defines name of the software which wants to read its configuration from <name/GoldED+/ configuration file. <name/GoldED+/ itself will ignore <kw/APP/ lines just like <ref target=REM/remark/ lines. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=REM/Remarks/ </item> <label> Example: </label> <item><eg> APP OtherProg REGKEY xyaxajlsaduoiweqeq APP OtherProg IRQ 5</eg> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREA> <head> AREA </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREA/ <ident><echoid> <<![ CDATA ["desc"]]>> <msgbase>[type] <location> [akano] [attrs]</ident><lb> <kw/AREA/ <ident><-FILE> <type> [path/file] [switches]</ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This <strong/obsolete/ keyword defines a mail area or external area setup. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> <table rows=7 cols=2> <row> <cell> <ident/echoid/ </cell> <cell> Mail area identifier. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/desc/ </cell> <cell> Area description in (<q></q>) quotes. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/msgbase/ </cell> <cell> F, O (<name/Opus/ <code/*.msg/); S (<name/FTS-0001/ <code/*.msg/); H, R, Q (<name/Hudson/, <name/QuickBBS/, <name/RemoteAccess/); M (<name/Squish/); J (<name/JAM/); E (<name/Ezycom/); G (<name/Goldbase/); P (<name/PCBoard/); X (<name/AdeptXBBS/); W (<name/WildCat!/); Y (<name/Synchronet/) </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/type/ </cell> <cell> N (Netmail), E (Echomail), L (Local). </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/location/ </cell> <cell> Directory path/file or board number. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/akano/ </cell> <cell> AKA number (starting from 0) </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/attrs/ </cell> <cell> <gi>R/O</gi> (Read-Only), and/or other attributes. </cell> </row> </table> </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> It is recommended to use the newer <ref target=AREADEF><kw/AREADEF/</ref> keyword, which allows more detailed mail area setup.<lb> If more than one area defined to the same path or areatag then last definition overrides previous ones.<lb> For the <ident/-FILE/ parameters see <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref> keyword. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> chapter, <ref target=AREADEF><kw/AREADEF/</ref>, <ref target=AREADESC><kw/AREADESC/</ref>, <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref>, <ref target=AREAEXCL><kw/AREAEXCL/</ref>, <ref target=AREAINCL><kw/AREAINCL/</ref>, <ref target=AREAISEMAIL><kw/AREAISEMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=AREAISNEWS><kw/AREAISNEWS/</ref>, <ref target=AREARENAME><kw/AREARENAME/</ref>, <ref target=AREASEP><kw/AREASEP/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSECHO><kw/ATTRIBSECHO/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSEMAIL><kw/ATTRIBSEMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSLOCAL><kw/ATTRIBSLOCAL/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSNET><kw/ATTRIBSNET/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSNEWS><kw/ATTRIBSNEWS/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBUTES><kw/ATTRIBUTES/</ref>, <ref target=GOLDBASEPATH><kw/GOLDBASEPATH/</ref>, <ref target=GOLDBASESYSPATH><kw/GOLDBASESYSPATH/</ref>, <ref target=HUDSONPATH><kw/HUDSONPATH/</ref>, <ref target=HUDSONSYSPATH><kw/HUDSONSYSPATH/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREAAUTOID> <head> AREAAUTOID </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREAAUTOID/ <ident><SHORT/VERBOSE/LONG></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Defines how an automatically created echoid should look, when <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref> finds an area without an echoid. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> <table rows=3 cols=2> <row> <cell> <ident>VERBOSE</ident> </cell> <cell> The echoids are given a name similar to the function of the area, such as <gi/NETMAIL/, <gi/NET_SENT/, <gi/ECHO_BAD/, <gi/ECHO_DUPES/ and so on. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident>LONG</ident> </cell> <cell> The echoids are numbered sequentially like this: <gi/NETMAILxxx/, <gi/ECHOMAILxxx/ and <gi/LOCALxxx/. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident>SHORT</ident> </cell> <cell> The echoids are numbered sequentially like this: <gi/NETxxx/, <gi/ECHOxxx/ and <gi/LOCALxxx/. </cell> </row> </table> </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/LONG/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2> <head> AREAAUTONEXT </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREAAUTONEXT/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls where to put cursor in arealist on startup and after exiting from an area you have been reading. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If enabled, <name/GoldED+/ will automatically jump to the first marked area in the arealist on startup, and the next marked area after exiting from an area you have been reading. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> </list> </div2> <div2> <head> AREACATCHUPREAD </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREACATCHUPREAD/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls whether <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/AREAcatchup/ will set all skipped messages to read or not. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If enabled, <name/GoldED+/ will set all skipped messages to read when using <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/AREAcatchup/ in the arealist-screen. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> This implies that <ref target=HIGHLIGHTUNREAD><kw/HIGHLIGHTUNREAD/</ref> feature is used, otherwise it has no function. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/AREAcatchup/, <ref target=HIGHLIGHTUNREAD><kw/HIGHLIGHTUNREAD/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREACFMREPLYTO> <head> AREACFMREPLYTO </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREACFMREPLYTO/ <ident/<echoid>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Sets the area where <name/GoldED+/ will create confirmation messages. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The destination area for the confirmation messages. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AREACOPYTO><kw/AREACOPYTO/</ref> <ref target=AREAFREQTO><kw/AREAFREQTO/</ref>, <ref target=AREAREPLYTO><kw/AREAREPLYTO/</ref>, <ref target=AREAYOUWROTETO><kw/AREAYOUWROTETO/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSCFM><kw/ATTRIBSCFM/</ref>, <ref target=CONFIRMFILE><kw/CONFIRMFILE/</ref>, <ref target=CONFIRMRESPONSE><kw/CONFIRMRESPONSE/</ref>, <ref target=RCVDISABLESCFM><kw/RCVDISABLESCFM/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREACOPYADDID> <head> AREACOPYADDID </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREACOPYADDID/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> It is useful if you copy echomails to some local archive areas. In this case <name/GoldED+/ can add the<eg> AREA:<OriginalEchoID></eg> kludge line to inform you from where you copied the mail to. This keyword should be enabled in the destination area parameters when used in the <ref target=RANDOMSYSTEM>Random System</ref> group. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If enabled, <name>GoldED+</name> will insert the <gi/AREA/ kludge at the top of each message that is copied or moved. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/NO/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> This keyword can be used globally and in a <ref target=RANDOMSYSTEM>Random System</ref> group.<lb> Do not enable this unless you know what you doing! </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/READcopymoveforward/, <ref target=AREACOPYDIRECT><kw/AREACOPYDIRECT/</ref>, <ref target=AREACOPYTO><kw/AREACOPYTO/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREACOPYDIRECT> <head> AREACOPYDIRECT </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREACOPYDIRECT/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls whether copy/move functions should bypass area selection screen. The destination area should be set with <ref target=AREACOPYTO><kw/AREACOPYTO/</ref> keyword. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If enabled, the destination area selection list is bypassed, thereby making possible a <q/seamless/ copy/move to the default destination area. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/NO/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> This keyword can be used globally and in a <ref target=RANDOMSYSTEM>Random System</ref> group. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/READcopymoveforward/, <ref target=AREACOPYADDID><kw/AREACOPYADDID/</ref>, <ref target=AREACOPYTO><kw/AREACOPYTO/</ref>, <ref target=AREAFORWARDDIRECT><kw/AREAFORWARDDIRECT/</ref>, <ref target=AREAFREQDIRECT><kw/AREAFREQDIRECT/</ref>, <ref target=AREAREPLYDIRECT><kw/AREAREPLYDIRECT/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREACOPYTO> <head> AREACOPYTO </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREACOPYTO/ <ident/<echoid>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Sets the default area for the copy/move functions. Typically you could set it to a safe/permanent storage type of area. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The default destination area for the copy/move functions. </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> This keyword can be used globally and in a <ref target=RANDOMSYSTEM>Random System</ref> group.<lb> The forward function uses the <ref target=AREAREPLYTO><kw/AREAREPLYTO/</ref> area instead. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/READcopymoveforward/, <ref target=AREACFMREPLYTO><kw/AREACFMREPLYTO/</ref>, <ref target=AREACOPYADDID><kw/AREACOPYADDID/</ref>, <ref target=AREACOPYDIRECT><kw/AREACOPYDIRECT/</ref>, <ref target=AREAFREQTO><kw/AREAFREQTO/</ref>, <ref target=AREAREPLYTO><kw/AREAREPLYTO/</ref>, <ref target=AREAYOUWROTETO><kw/AREAYOUWROTETO/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREADEF> <head> AREADEF </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREADEF/ <ident><echoid> <<![ CDATA ["desc"]]>> <group> <type> <msgbase> <path/board> <aka> <(attrs)> [<![ CDATA ["origin"]]>]</ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword defines a mail area in <name>GoldED+</name>. It looks a lot like the <ref target=AREA><kw/AREA/</ref> keyword. Additional parameters are the <ident/group/, the verbose <ident/type/ and <ident/msgbase/, the fully specified <ident/aka/ address, the brackets for the attributes and the optional <ident/origin/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> <table rows=9 cols=2> <row> <cell> <ident>echoid</ident> </cell> <cell> Mail area identifier. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident><![ CDATA ["desc"]]></ident> </cell> <cell> Area description in quotes. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident>group</ident> </cell> <cell> Group ID uppercase letter (A-Z) or 0 if not in a group. Use #groupnumber to specify group numbers in the 1-999 range. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident>type</ident> </cell> <cell> <ident/Net/, <ident/Echo/, <ident/Local/, <ident/EMail/ or <ident/News/. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident>msgbase</ident> </cell> <cell> <ident/Opus/, <ident/FTS1/, <ident/Hudson/, <ident/Squish/, <ident/Ezycom/, <ident/JAM/, <ident/Goldbase/, <ident/PCBoard/, <ident/WildCat/, <ident/XBBS/, or <ident/SMB/. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident>path/board</ident> </cell> <cell> Area path, board number or base filename. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident>aka</ident> </cell> <cell> Address for the area, or <q>.</q> for the main address. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident>(attrs)</ident> </cell> <cell> Default attributes in brackets. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident><![ CDATA ["origin"]]></ident> </cell> <cell> Optional default origin in quotes. </cell> </row> </table> </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> If more than one area defined to the same path or areatag then last definition overrides previous ones.<lb> The possibility of using <q/./ to specify the main <abbr/AKA/ and the optional default origin makes it simpler to create a common <ref target=INCLUDE><kw/INCLUDE/</ref>'able area configuration for several setups with different addresses, for example two people sharing the same msgbase.<lb> If you wish to read packed area (f.e. from CD archive) <name/GoldED+/ allows you that. You need to specify pathname <hi/with/ extension in the <ident>path/board</ident> field, set <gi/PKD/ attribute and define packer with <ref target=UNPACKER><kw/UNPACKER/</ref> keyword. This feature is not supported for <name/Hudson/ and <name/GoldBase/ messagebases. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> chapter, <ref target=AREA><kw/AREA/</ref>, <ref target=AREADESC><kw/AREADESC/</ref>, <ref target=AREAEXCL><kw/AREAEXCL/</ref>, <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref>, <ref target=AREAINCL><kw/AREAINCL/</ref>, <ref target=AREAISEMAIL><kw/AREAISEMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=AREAISNEWS><kw/AREAISNEWS/</ref>, <ref target=AREARENAME><kw/AREARENAME/</ref>, <ref target=AREASEP><kw/AREASEP/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSECHO><kw/ATTRIBSECHO/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSEMAIL><kw/ATTRIBSEMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSLOCAL><kw/ATTRIBSLOCAL/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSNET><kw/ATTRIBSNET/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSNEWS><kw/ATTRIBSNEWS/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBUTES><kw/ATTRIBUTES/</ref>, <ref target=GOLDBASEPATH><kw/GOLDBASEPATH/</ref>, <ref target=GOLDBASESYSPATH><kw/GOLDBASESYSPATH/</ref>, <ref target=HUDSONPATH><kw/HUDSONPATH/</ref>, <ref target=HUDSONSYSPATH><kw/HUDSONSYSPATH/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREADESC> <head> AREADESC </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREADESC/ <ident><echoid> <<![ CDATA ["desc"]]>> [group] [aka] [(attrs)] [<![ CDATA ["origin"]]>]</ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Adds a description and optionally a group letter, <abbr>AKA</abbr>, attributes and origin to an <hi>existing</hi> (previously defined) area. This is useful if you use an areafile that does not contain descriptions, groups, akas, attributes or origins. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> <table rows=6 cols=2> <row> <cell> <ident>echoid</ident> </cell> <cell> Mail area identifier. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident><![ CDATA ["desc"]]></ident> </cell> <cell> Area description in quotes. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident>group</ident> </cell> <cell> Optional groupid uppercase letter (A-Z) or 0 if not in a group. Use #groupnumber to specify group numbers in the 1-999 range or <q>-</q> to keep the existing groupid. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident>aka</ident> </cell> <cell> Optional <abbr>AKA</abbr> address for the area, or <q>.</q> for main <abbr>AKA</abbr>, or <q>-</q> to keep the existing <abbr>AKA</abbr>. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident>(attrs)</ident> </cell> <cell> Optional default attributes in brackets, <q>-</q> to keep the existing attributes. Note that if they are specified, they are <hi>added</hi> to the default net/echo/local attributes. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident><![ CDATA ["origin"]]></ident> </cell> <cell> Optional default origin in quotes. </cell> </row> </table> </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> You cannot skip any of the optional parts in the middle, even if you only want to set, say, an origin. Use <q>-</q> to keep the existing value for the parts you skip. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> chapter, <ref target=AREA><kw/AREA/</ref>, <ref target=AREADEF><kw/AREADEF/</ref>, <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref>, <ref target=AREAISEMAIL><kw/AREAISEMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=AREAISNEWS><kw/AREAISNEWS/</ref>, <ref target=AREARENAME><kw/AREARENAME/</ref>, <ref target=AREASEP><kw/AREASEP/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSECHO><kw/ATTRIBSECHO/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSEMAIL><kw/ATTRIBSEMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSLOCAL><kw/ATTRIBSLOCAL/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSNET><kw/ATTRIBSNET/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSNEWS><kw/ATTRIBSNEWS/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBUTES><kw/ATTRIBUTES/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREAEXCL> <head> AREAEXCL </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREAEXCL/ <ident/<echoid mask>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> With this keyword, you can define the echoids of areas which should be ignored by <name/GoldED+/ (thereby leaving them out of the arealist). This is normally used in connection with <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref>, to exclude areas you are not interested in reading. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The <ident/<echoid mask>/ may contain <name/4DOS/-style wildcards (<q/*/ and <q/?/). You may specify multiple masks separated with commas. </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> You can use the <ref target=AREAINCL><kw/AREAINCL/</ref> keyword to reinclude areas which have been excluded with <kw/AREAEXCL/.<lb> This keyword must be placed before any of <ref target=AREA><kw/AREA/</ref>, <ref target=AREADEF><kw/AREADEF/</ref>, or <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref> keywords. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AREA><kw/AREA/</ref>, <ref target=AREADEF><kw/AREADEF/</ref>, <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref>, <ref target=AREAINCL><kw/AREAINCL/</ref>, <ref target=AREARENAME><kw/AREARENAME/</ref> </item> <label> Example: </label> <item><eg> AREAEXCL * ; Excludes all areas. AREAEXCL *INTER* ; Excludes all areas containing INTER anywhere in the ; echoid. AREAEXCL INT*.* ; Excludes all areas beginning with INT and ; containing a dot anywhere in the echoid.</eg> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREAFILE> <head> AREAFILE </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREAFILE/ <ident><type> [path/file] [switches]</ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> <name/GoldED+/ can read the area setup of many popular mailers, mail processors and <abbr/BBS/'es, thereby making it much easier and simpler to configure <name/GoldED+/ for the mail areas you receive, by eliminating the need to write area definition lines for all or most of your areas. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> <table rows=3 cols=2> <row> <cell> <ident/type/ </cell> <cell> Name of the program. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident>path/file</ident> </cell> <cell> Filename or path to the area setup files. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/switches/ </cell> <cell> Areafile specific switches. </cell> </row> </table> </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> For most programs, <name>GoldED+</name> can automatically find the path or filename using environment variables. By default, <name/GoldED+/ will look for the area setup files in the <ref target=AREAPATH><kw/AREAPATH/</ref>. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ptr target=AREACONFIGURATION> chapter, <ref target=AREA><kw/AREA/</ref>, <ref target=AREADEF><kw/AREADEF/</ref>, <ref target=AREAEXCL><kw/AREAEXCL/</ref>, <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref>, <ref target=AREAFILEGROUPS><kw/AREAFILEGROUPS/</ref>, <ref target=AREAINCL><kw/AREAINCL/</ref>, <ref target=AREAISEMAIL><kw/AREAISEMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=AREAISNEWS><kw/AREAISNEWS/</ref>, <ref target=AREARENAME><kw/AREARENAME/</ref>, <ref target=AREAPATH><kw/AREAPATH/</ref>, <ref target=AREASEP><kw/AREASEP/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSECHO><kw/ATTRIBSECHO/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSEMAIL><kw/ATTRIBSEMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSLOCAL><kw/ATTRIBSLOCAL/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSNET><kw/ATTRIBSNET/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSNEWS><kw/ATTRIBSNEWS/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBUTES><kw/ATTRIBUTES/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREAFILEGROUPS> <head> AREAFILEGROUPS </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREAFILEGROUPS/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> In some <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref> setups, you can groups the areas using single letters (A-Z) or numbers (#1-999). </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If this keyword is enabled, <name>GoldED+</name> will use the area groupid instead of the area echoid when gathering area specific information from the <ref target=RANDOMSYSTEM>Random System</ref> group. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> This have only sence if you using <ref target=RANDOMSYSTEM>Random System</ref> groups. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ptr target=RANDOMSYSTEM> chapter </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREAFORWARDDIRECT> <head> AREAFORWARDDIRECT </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREAFORWARDDIRECT/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls whether forward functions should bypass area selection screen. The destination area should be set with <ref target=AREAREPLYTO><kw/AREAREPLYTO/</ref> keyword. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If enabled, the destination area selection list is bypassed, thereby making possible a <q/seamless/ forward to the default destination area. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/NO/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> This keyword can be used globally and in a <ref target=RANDOMSYSTEM>Random System</ref> group. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/READcopymoveforward/, <ref target=AREACOPYDIRECT><kw/AREACOPYDIRECT/</ref>, <ref target=AREAFREQDIRECT><kw/AREAFREQDIRECT/</ref>, <ref target=AREAREPLYDIRECT><kw/AREAREPLYDIRECT/</ref>, <ref target=AREAREPLYTO><kw/AREAREPLYTO/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREAFREQDIRECT> <head> AREAFREQDIRECT </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREAFREQDIRECT/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls whether filerequest functions should bypass area selection screen. The destination area should be set with <ref target=AREAFREQTO><kw/AREAFREQTO/</ref> keyword. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If enabled, the destination area selection list is bypassed, thereby making possible a <q/seamless/ filerequest in the default destination area. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/NO/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> This keyword can be used globally and in a <ref target=RANDOMSYSTEM>Random System</ref> group.<lb> If you (like most) only have one mailer netmail area, you can enable this feature globally for simpler file requests. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/READfilerequest/, <ref target=AREACOPYDIRECT><kw/AREACOPYDIRECT/</ref>, <ref target=AREAFORWARDDIRECT><kw/AREAFORWARDDIRECT/</ref>, <ref target=AREAFREQTO><kw/AREAFREQTO/</ref>, <ref target=AREAREPLYDIRECT><kw/AREAREPLYDIRECT/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSFRQ><kw/ATTRIBSFRQ/</ref>, <ref target=FRQEXT><kw/FRQEXT/</ref>, <ref target=FRQNODEMAP><kw/FRQNODEMAP/</ref>, <ref target=FRQOPTIONS><kw/FRQOPTIONS/</ref>, <ref target=FRQWAZOO><kw/FRQWAZOO/</ref>, <ref target=OUTBOUNDPATH><kw/OUTBOUNDPATH/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREAFREQTO> <head> AREAFREQTO </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREAFREQTO/ <ident/<echoid>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Sets the default area for the filerequest functions. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The default destination area for the filerequest functions. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> First netmail area. </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> This keyword can be used globally and in a <ref target=RANDOMSYSTEM>Random System</ref> group. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/READfilerequest/, <ref target=AREACFMREPLYTO><kw/AREACFMREPLYTO/</ref>, <ref target=AREACOPYTO><kw/AREACOPYTO/</ref>, <ref target=AREAFREQDIRECT><kw/AREAFREQDIRECT/</ref>, <ref target=AREAREPLYTO><kw/AREAREPLYTO/</ref>, <ref target=AREAYOUWROTETO><kw/AREAYOUWROTETO/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSFRQ><kw/ATTRIBSFRQ/</ref>, <ref target=FRQEXT><kw/FRQEXT/</ref>, <ref target=FRQNODEMAP><kw/FRQNODEMAP/</ref>, <ref target=FRQOPTIONS><kw/FRQOPTIONS/</ref>, <ref target=FRQWAZOO><kw/FRQWAZOO/</ref>, <ref target=OUTBOUNDPATH><kw/OUTBOUNDPATH/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREAINCL> <head> AREAINCL </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREAINCL/ <ident/<echoid mask>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> With this keyword, you can define the echoids of areas which should be reincluded by <name/GoldED+/, if they have been excluded with the <ref target=AREAEXCL><kw/AREAEXCL/</ref> keyword. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The <ident/<echoid mask>/ may contain <name/4DOS/-style wildcards (<q/*/ and <q/?/). You may specify multiple masks separated with commas. </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> This keyword must be placed before any of <ref target=AREA><kw/AREA/</ref>, <ref target=AREADEF><kw/AREADEF/</ref>, or <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref> keywords. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AREA><kw/AREA/</ref>, <ref target=AREADEF><kw/AREADEF/</ref>, <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref>, <ref target=AREAEXCL><kw/AREAEXCL/</ref>, <ref target=AREARENAME><kw/AREARENAME/</ref> </item> <label> Example: </label> <item><eg> AREAINCL * ; Includes all areas. AREAINCL *INTER* ; Includes all areas containing INTER anywhere in the ; echoid. AREAINCL INT*.* ; Includes all areas beginning with INT and ; containing a dot anywhere in the echoid.</eg> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREAISEMAIL> <head> AREAISEMAIL </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREAISEMAIL/ <ident/<echoid mask>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> These keyword is designed to mark areas which are read from an <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref> as <name/Internet/ e-mail. This may be necessary in some cases to enable the <name/Internet/ specific features without having to manually define all <name/Internet/ areas. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The <ident/<echoid mask>/ may contain <name/4DOS/-style wildcards (<q/*/ and <q/?/). You may specify multiple masks separated with commas. </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> This keyword must be placed before any of <ref target=AREA><kw/AREA/</ref>, <ref target=AREADEF><kw/AREADEF/</ref>, or <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref> keywords. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AREA><kw/AREA/</ref>, <ref target=AREADEF><kw/AREADEF/</ref>, <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref>, <ref target=AREAISNEWS><kw/AREAISNEWS/</ref>, <ref target=AREARENAME><kw/AREARENAME/</ref> </item> <label> Example: </label> <item><eg> AREAISEMAIL djgpp*, golded-plus*</eg> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREAISNEWS> <head> AREAISNEWS </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREAISNEWS/ <ident/<echoid mask>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> These keyword is designed to mark areas which are read from an <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref> as <name/Internet/ newsgroup. This may be necessary in some cases to enable the <name/Internet/ specific features without having to manually define all <name/Internet/ areas. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The <ident/<echoid mask>/ may contain <name/4DOS/-style wildcards (<q/*/ and <q/?/). You may specify multiple masks separated with commas. </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> This keyword must be placed before any of <ref target=AREA><kw/AREA/</ref>, <ref target=AREADEF><kw/AREADEF/</ref>, or <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref> keywords. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AREA><kw/AREA/</ref>, <ref target=AREADEF><kw/AREADEF/</ref>, <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref>, <ref target=AREAISEMAIL><kw/AREAISEMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=AREARENAME><kw/AREARENAME/</ref> </item> <label> Example: </label> <item><eg> AREAISNEWS alt.*, rec.*, sci.*</eg> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREAKEEPLAST> <head> AREAKEEPLAST </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREAKEEPLAST/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls whether <name/GoldED+/ should write the file <code/goldlast.lst/ in the <ref target=GOLDPATH><kw/GOLDPATH/</ref> at exit and read it back when run next time. The contents of the file is a list of lastread information for each area as it was at last scan.<lb> This feature is helpful when you know that there have not been tossed new mail and don't want to wait for a full msgbase scan. Now you can just hit <ESC> at the startup screen to abort the area scan and <name/GoldED+/ will put up the lastread info from the previous session.<lb> It also makes the <q/new mail since last scan/ feature even better, because the new mail marker now shows which areas that have new mail since last session even when scanning areas at startup. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> Setting this keyword to <ident/YES/ enables <code/goldlast.lst/ usage, setting to <ident/NO/ disables writes to this file. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> <name/GoldED+/ only writes the <code/goldlast.lst/ file at exit if it survived the initial startup scan. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/AREAscan/, <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/AREAscanpm/, <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/AREAwritegoldlast/, <ref target=AREALISTSCAN><kw/AREALISTSCAN/</ref>, <ref target=AREAPMSCAN><kw/AREAPMSCAN/</ref>, <ref target=AREASCAN><kw/AREASCAN/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREALISTECHOMAX> <head> AREALISTECHOMAX </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREALISTECHOMAX/ <ident/<size>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Allows you to specify a fixed or dynamically sized width of the <gi/EchoID/ column in the arealist. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If a negative value is specified, the width will be the that of the widest echoid in the arealist plus the negative value. This might be useful if some long-name echoes have uninteresting ends, such as <gi/VERYLONGECHOID_R23.PUB/ (could benefit from a <ident/size/ of -7). There is currently no provision for long echoids with common beginning. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/0/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> The arealist can dynamically resize the <gi/EchoID/ and <gi/Description/ columns, so that long echoids are not cut off. The sizing of the <q>EchoID</q> column is done against the <gi/Description/ column, which thereby looses or gains width. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AREALISTFORMAT><kw/AREALISTFORMAT/</ref>, <ref target=AREALISTGROUPID><kw/AREALISTGROUPID/</ref>, <ref target=AREALISTGROUPORDER><kw/AREALISTGROUPORDER/</ref>, <ref target=AREALISTNOS><kw/AREALISTNOS/</ref>, <ref target=AREALISTPAGEBAR><kw/AREALISTPAGEBAR/</ref>, <ref target=AREALISTSORT><kw/AREALISTSORT/</ref>, <ref target=AREALISTTYPE><kw/AREALISTTYPE/</ref>, <ref target=AREASEP><kw/AREASEP/</ref>, </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREALISTFORMAT> <head> AREALISTFORMAT </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREALISTFORMAT/ <ident/<string>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> The arealist column layout is configurable. This keyword allows you to change the layout to whatever you like. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The string should be composed from the following letters: <table rows=10 cols=3> <row> <cell> Letter </cell> <cell> Meaning </cell> <cell> Default width </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/A/ </cell> <cell> Area number </cell> <cell> 4 </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/M/ </cell> <cell> Marked </cell> <cell> 1 </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/D/ </cell> <cell> Description </cell> <cell> Dynamic </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/C/ </cell> <cell> Number of messages </cell> <cell> 6 </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/P/ </cell> <cell> Personal mail mark (<q/+/) </cell> <cell> 1 </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/U/ </cell> <cell> Number of unread/new messages </cell> <cell> 6 </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/N/ </cell> <cell> Changed since last scan mark (<q/*/) </cell> <cell> 1 </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/E/ </cell> <cell> Echoid </cell> <cell> <ref target=AREALISTECHOMAX><kw/AREALISTECHOMAX/</ref> </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/G/ </cell> <cell> Groupid </cell> <cell> Dynamic: 0, 1 or 3 </cell> </row> </table> You can also specify widths for each or particular fields if you don't like the defaults by putting number right after the letter.<lb> If you leave out a letter, that column will not be shown. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident><![ CDATA ["AM D CPUN E G "]]></ident> </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> Use only the defined letters. Use spaces to specify required space between columns. Use only positive numbers for widths. Failure to obey these rules may cause undocumented behaviour. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AREALISTECHOMAX><kw/AREALISTECHOMAX/</ref>, <ref target=AREALISTGROUPID><kw/AREALISTGROUPID/</ref>, <ref target=AREALISTGROUPORDER><kw/AREALISTGROUPORDER/</ref>, <ref target=AREALISTNOS><kw/AREALISTNOS/</ref>, <ref target=AREALISTPAGEBAR><kw/AREALISTPAGEBAR/</ref>, <ref target=AREALISTSORT><kw/AREALISTSORT/</ref>, <ref target=AREALISTTYPE><kw/AREALISTTYPE/</ref>, <ref target=AREASEP><kw/AREASEP/</ref> </item> <label> Example: </label> <item><eg><![ CDATA [ AREALISTFORMAT "AM D C4PU4N E G "]]></eg> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREALISTGROUPID> <head> AREALISTGROUPID </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREALISTGROUPID/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This feature provides a way to hide group ID on the arealist screen, in a column to the right of the <gi/EchoID/ column. If a group ID is not a letter in the range A-Z (a value in the range #65-#90), the groupid is not shown anyway. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If enabled, the arealist screen will display the groupid letters, if any. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> The same effect is achieved by skipping <ident/G/ letter in the <ref target=AREALISTFORMAT><kw/AREALISTFORMAT/</ref> definition. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AREAFILEGROUPS><kw/AREAFILEGROUPS/</ref>, <ref target=AREALISTFORMAT><kw/AREALISTFORMAT/</ref>, <ref target=AREALISTGROUPORDER><kw/AREALISTGROUPORDER/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREALISTGROUPORDER> <head> AREALISTGROUPORDER </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREALISTGROUPORDER/ <ident/<string>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword allows to change the order in which areas will be sorted when sorting by group ID is used. If some groups are not found in the <ident/string/ they will be placed below specifyed ones in alphabetical order. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The only parameter is string which specifies groups order. You may use #groupnumber to specify group numbers in the 1-999 range. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> Empty string. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AREAFILEGROUPS><kw/AREAFILEGROUPS/</ref>, <ref target=AREALISTGROUPID><kw/AREALISTGROUPID/</ref>, <ref target=AREALISTSORT><kw/AREALISTSORT/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREALISTNOS> <head> AREALISTNOS </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREALISTNOS/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword allows to specify whether board number or sequential area number will be displayed in the arealist. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If enabled, <name/GoldED+/ will display the board numbers of <name/Hudson/ or <name/GoldBase/ areas in the arealist instead of the default sequential numbers. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/NO/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/AREAboardnos/, <ref target=AREALISTFORMAT><kw/AREALISTFORMAT/</ref>, <ref target=AREALISTECHOMAX><kw/AREALISTECHOMAX/</ref>, <ref target=AREALISTTYPE><kw/AREALISTTYPE/</ref>, <ref target=DISPAREANO><kw/DISPAREANO/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREALISTPAGEBAR> <head> AREALISTPAGEBAR </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREALISTPAGEBAR/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Enables or disables a pagebar (scrollbar) in the arealist. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If enabled, <name/GoldED+/ will display pagebar in the arealist, if disabled - will not. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AREALISTFORMAT><kw/AREALISTFORMAT/</ref>, <ref target=DISPPAGEBAR><kw/DISPPAGEBAR/</ref>, <ref target=FILELISTPAGEBAR><kw/FILELISTPAGEBAR/</ref>, <ref target=MSGLISTPAGEBAR><kw/MSGLISTPAGEBAR/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREALISTSCAN> <head> AREALISTSCAN </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREALISTSCAN/ <ident><<![ CDATA ["L menu text"]]>> [path]<filename> [-delete]</ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword allows you to define additional menu items for the arealist scanning menus (<!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/AREAscan/ or <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/AREAscanpm/). </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The first two characters of the menu text are the <q/hotkey/ letter that will be highlighted in the menu text, plus a space.<lb> The filename specifies a plain text file, with the echoids (wildcards allowed) of the areas you want to scan when the menu item is selected. There can be several echoids on each line in the file. If no path is given, the file is loaded from the <ref target=GOLDPATH><kw/GOLDPATH/</ref>.<lb> The <ident/-delete/ option will cause <name/GoldED+/ to delete the list file after scanning the areas in it. For example, if your mail processor generates a list of the areas that it tossed new mail to, you could add the list as a menu item on the scanning menu and use it to scan only those areas with new mail. </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> Some mail processors automatically delete their list after using it for replylinking. You may want to do some creative stuff with batchfiles to grab a copy. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/AREAscan/, <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/AREAscanpm/ </item> <label> Example: </label> <item><eg><![ CDATA [ AREALISTSCAN "g Scan Newsgroups" NEWSGRPS.LST AREALISTSCAN "L Scan Latest" R:\GECHO\IMPORT.ALL -delete]]></eg> <eg> === Cut, NEWSGRPS.LST === ALT.*, COMP.*, MISC.*, NEWS.* REC.*, SOC.*, SCI.*, TALK.* === Cut ===</eg> <eg> === Cut from an import batchfile === gecho mgr toss pack -tossbad if exist import.jam type import.jam >>import.all if exist import.hmb type import.hmb >>import.all if exist import.sdm type import.sdm >>import.all mbutil link -clean === Cut ===</eg> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREALISTSORT> <head> AREALISTSORT </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREALISTSORT/ <ident/<sortspec>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword defines how the area list should be sorted. You can override the default setting from the commandline with the <code>-s</code> switch. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The <sortspec> can be composed of the following types: <table rows=16 cols=2> <row> <cell> <ident/A/ </cell> <cell> Sort by aka. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/B/ </cell> <cell> Sort by board number. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/D/ </cell> <cell> Sort by description. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/E/ </cell> <cell> Sort by echoid. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/F/ </cell> <cell> Sorts all <q/fuzzy search/ matches first. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/G/ </cell> <cell> Sort by group (if any). </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/M/ </cell> <cell> Sorts all marked areas first. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/O/ </cell> <cell> Sort by original order. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/P/ </cell> <cell> Sort by personal mail count. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/p/ </cell> <cell> Sort by personal mail presence. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/S/ </cell> <cell> Sort area separators first. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/T/ </cell> <cell> Sort by type (according to <ref target=AREATYPEORDER><kw/AREATYPEORDER/</ref>). </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/U/ </cell> <cell> Sort by unread messages count (try it!). </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/u/ </cell> <cell> Sort by unread messages presence (try it!). </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/X/ </cell> <cell> Sort by msgbase type. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/Y/ </cell> <cell> Sorts all areas with <q/new/ mail first. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/Z/ </cell> <cell> Sort by msgbase path. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/-/ </cell> <cell> Descending sort (largest first). </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/+/ </cell> <cell> Ascending sort (smallest first) (default). </cell> </row> </table> </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/FYTUE/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> In practice <ident/M/ and <ident/Y/ will usually give the same result, because <name/GoldED+/ automatically marks scanned areas if they contain new mail.<lb> The <ident/F/ enables fuzzy match sorting, which is very handy when looking for an echoid containing a particular word. Let's say you want a list of all <name/GoldED/ echoes. You can simply type <q/GOLDED/ and then the arealist automatically sorts itself so that all echoes with an echoid containing <q/GOLDED/ comes first.<lb> The <ident/X/ sort type sorts areas according to msgbase type, in the following order: <name/Hudson/, <name/Goldbase/, <name/JAM/, <name/Squish/, <name/Opus/ <code/*.msg/, <name/FTS-0001/ <code/*.msg/, <name/Ezycom/, <name/PCBoard/.<lb> The <ident/X/ and <ident/Z/ sort types were implemented for internal use, to optimize area scanning speed. When scanning areas, <name/GoldED+/ starts by sorting the arealist using the sortspec defined with the <ref target=AREASCANSORT><kw/AREASCANSORT/</ref> keyword. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ptr target=AREACONFIGURATION> chapter, <ptr target=COMMANDLINE> chapter, <ref target=AREA><kw/AREA/</ref>, <ref target=AREADEF><kw/AREADEF/</ref>, <ref target=AREAEXCL><kw/AREAEXCL/</ref>, <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref>, <ref target=AREAFILEGROUPS><kw/AREAFILEGROUPS/</ref>, <ref target=AREAINCL><kw/AREAINCL/</ref>, <ref target=AREAISEMAIL><kw/AREAISEMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=AREAISNEWS><kw/AREAISNEWS/</ref>, <ref target=AREALISTGROUPORDER><kw/AREALISTGROUPORDER/</ref>, <ref target=AREASCANSORT><kw/AREASCANSORT/</ref>, <ref target=AREASEP><kw/AREASEP/</ref>, <ref target=AREATYPEORDER><kw/AREATYPEORDER/</ref> </item> <label> Example: </label> <item><eg> AREALISTSORT -U+TE</eg> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREALISTTYPE> <head> AREALISTTYPE </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREALISTTYPE/ <ident><NEW/LAST></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Defines the contents of the 4th column (the one after the <gi/Total/ column). </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> <table rows=2 cols=2> <row> <cell> <ident/NEW/ </cell> <cell> Displays the amount of new (unread) msgs (Actually number of messages after lastread mark). </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/LAST/ </cell> <cell> Displays the number of the last msg read. </cell> </row> </table> </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/NEW/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AREALISTFORMAT><kw/AREALISTFORMAT/</ref>, <ref target=AREALISTGROUPID><kw/AREALISTGROUPID/</ref>, <ref target=AREALISTNOS><kw/AREALISTNOS/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREAPATH> <head> AREAPATH </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREAPATH/ <ident/<path>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword defines where the area setup files are located when <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref> keyword is used. It is also defines default path for the semaphores. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The <ident/path/ defines the path to the area setup files. </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> Most <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref> types can find the path using the environment variable(s) specific for the program(s). Such environment variables (or a path specified with the <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref> definition) always overrides the <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref>. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ptr target=AREACONFIGURATION> chapter, <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref>, <ref target=SEMAPHORE><kw/SEMAPHORE/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREAPMSCAN> <head> AREAPMSCAN </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREAPMSCAN/ <ident/<echoid mask>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword defines areas which will be automatically scanned for personal mail when starting <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The <ident/<echoid mask>/ may contain <name/4DOS/-style wildcards (<q/*/ and <q/?/). You may specify multiple masks separated with commas. If mask started with the > (greater) character, then it represent group ID. </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> It is recommended to have to scan all areas at startup. If you don't want to wait for the scan to complete, you can abort the scan by pressing <ESC> during startup. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AREAPMSCANEXCL><kw/AREAPMSCANEXCL/</ref>, <ref target=AREAPMSCANINCL><kw/AREAPMSCANINCL/</ref>, <ref target=AREASCAN><kw/AREASCAN/</ref>, <ref target=AREASCANEXCL><kw/AREASCANEXCL/</ref>, <ref target=AREASCANINCL><kw/AREASCANINCL/</ref> </item> <label> Example: </label> <item><eg> AREAPMSCAN * ; Scan all areas. AREAPMSCAN *INTER* ; Scan all areas containing INTER anywhere in the ; echoid AREAPMSCAN INT*.* ; Scan all areas beginning with INT and ; containing a dot anywhere in the echoid</eg> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREAPMSCANEXCL> <head> AREAPMSCANEXCL </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREAPMSCANEXCL/ <ident/<echoid mask>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> With this keyword you can prevent areas from being scanned with <ref target=AREAPMSCAN><kw/AREAPMSCAN/</ref> on startup. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The <ident/<echoid mask>/ may contain <name/4DOS/-style wildcards (<q/*/ and <q/?/). You may specify multiple masks separated with commas. If mask started with the > (greater) character, then it represent group ID. </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> This is good if you use <ref target=AREAPMSCAN><kw/AREAPMSCAN/</ref> to scan all areas, but have some big areas which slows it down.<lb> You can use the <ref target=AREAPMSCANINCL><kw/AREAPMSCANINCL/</ref> keyword to reinclude areas which have been excluded with <kw/AREAPMSCANEXCL/. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AREAPMSCAN><kw/AREAPMSCAN/</ref>, <ref target=AREAPMSCANINCL><kw/AREAPMSCANINCL/</ref>, <ref target=AREASCAN><kw/AREASCAN/</ref>, <ref target=AREASCANEXCL><kw/AREASCANEXCL/</ref>, <ref target=AREASCANINCL><kw/AREASCANINCL/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREAPMSCANINCL> <head> AREAPMSCANINCL </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREAPMSCANINCL/ <ident/<echoid mask>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword allows to specify areas which are to be scanned with <ref target=AREAPMSCAN><kw/AREAPMSCAN/</ref> even if they were excluded with <ref target=AREAPMSCANEXCL><kw/AREAPMSCANEXCL/</ref>. Useful for partial reversal of wildcard specs in the excludes. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The <ident/<echoid mask>/ may contain <name/4DOS/-style wildcards (<q/*/ and <q/?/). You may specify multiple masks separated with commas. If mask started with the > (greater) character, then it represent group ID. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AREAPMSCAN><kw/AREAPMSCAN/</ref>, <ref target=AREAPMSCANEXCL><kw/AREAPMSCANEXCL/</ref>, <ref target=AREASCAN><kw/AREASCAN/</ref>, <ref target=AREASCANEXCL><kw/AREASCANEXCL/</ref>, <ref target=AREASCANINCL><kw/AREASCANINCL/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREAREADONLY> <head> AREAREADONLY </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREAREADONLY/ <ident><SOFT/HARD></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This option is designed for those who setup a system for new computer users who might be confused enough to enter a message in a read-only area despite the warning menu. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If this keyword is set to <ident/HARD/, it is no longer possible to enter/reply/change messages in areas marked read-only with the <gi>R/O</gi> area attribute. The <ident/SOFT/ setting uses a menu to ask permission as in the previous versions. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/SOFT/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> chapter, <ref target=AREA><kw/AREA/</ref>, <ref target=AREADEF><kw/AREADEF/</ref>, <ref target=AREADESC><kw/AREADESC/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREARENAME> <head> AREARENAME </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREARENAME/ <ident/<from echoid> <to echoid>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Renames one echoid to another. The feature is meant to be used in connection with <kw>AREAFILE</kw>, where some types do not store echoids with the areas (and <name>GoldED+</name> then automatically gives them unique echoids). Also you may rename areas with long echoid to the shorter one. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> <ident/<From echoid>/ defines the original name for the area (given by the <name/GoldED+/ automatically) and <ident/<to echoid>/ defines echoid in the form it will be listed in the arealist. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AREAAUTOID><kw/AREAAUTOID/</ref>, <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref>, <ref target=AREALISTFORMAT><kw/AREALISTFORMAT/</ref> </item> <label> Example: </label> <item><eg> AREARENAME NET001 NETMAIL AREARENAME ECHO001 BAD_MSGS AREARENAME LOCAL001 BBS.USERS</eg> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREAREPLYDIRECT> <head> AREAREPLYDIRECT </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREAREPLYDIRECT/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls whether <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/READcommentmsg/, <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/READquotemsg/, and <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/READreplymsg/ functions should reply to the different area bypassing area selection screen. The destination area is choosen as follows: <list type=simple> <item> Contents of the <gi/AREA/ kludge if enabled with <ref target=USEAREA><kw/USEAREA/</ref>. </item> <item> Area set with <ref target=AREAREPLYTO><kw/AREAREPLYTO/</ref> keyword. </item> <item> Current area. </item> </list> </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If enabled, <name/GoldED+/ will bypass area selection screen, if disabled - will not. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/NO/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> This keyword can be used globally and in a <ref target=RANDOMSYSTEM>Random System</ref> group.<lb> It is probably not a good idea to enable this keyword globally.<lb> If you run a utility or have a mail processor which copies personal mail to a separate area and puts an <gi/AREA/ kludge at the top of the messages, you should create a random system group for the area and enable <kw>AREAREPLYDIRECT</kw> in it. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/READcommentmsg/, <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/READquotemsg/, <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/READreplymsg/, <ref target=AREACOPYDIRECT><kw/AREACOPYDIRECT/</ref>, <ref target=AREAFORWARDDIRECT><kw/AREAFORWARDDIRECT/</ref>, <ref target=AREAFREQDIRECT><kw/AREAFREQDIRECT/</ref>, <ref target=AREAREPLYTO><kw/AREAREPLYTO/</ref> </item> <label> Example: </label> <item><eg> GROUP ECHO_PERSONAL AREAREPLYDIRECT YES ENDGROUP</eg> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREAREPLYTO> <head> AREAREPLYTO </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREAREPLYTO/ <ident/<echoid>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Sets the default area for the reply and forward functions. Typically you could set it to a safe/permanent storage type of area. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The default destination area for the reply and forward functions. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> First netmail area. </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> This keyword can be used globally and in a <ref target=RANDOMSYSTEM>Random System</ref> group. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/READcopymoveforward/, <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/READmovecommentmsg/, <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/READmovequotemsg/, <ref target=AREACFMREPLYTO><kw/AREACFMREPLYTO/</ref>, <ref target=AREACOPYTO><kw/AREACOPYTO/</ref>, <ref target=AREAFREQTO><kw/AREAFREQTO/</ref>, <ref target=AREAREPLYDIRECT><kw/AREAREPLYDIRECT/</ref>, <ref target=AREAYOUWROTETO><kw/AREAYOUWROTETO/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREASCAN> <head> AREASCAN </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREASCAN/ <ident/<echoid mask>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword defines areas which will be automatically scanned for new mail when starting <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The <ident/<echoid mask>/ may contain <name/4DOS/-style wildcards (<q/*/ and <q/?/). You may specify multiple masks separated with commas. If mask started with the > (greater) character, then it represent group ID. </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> It is recommended to have to scan all areas at startup. If you don't want to wait for the scan to complete, you can abort the scan by pressing <ESC> during startup. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AREAPMSCAN><kw/AREAPMSCAN/</ref>, <ref target=AREAPMSCANEXCL><kw/AREAPMSCANEXCL/</ref>, <ref target=AREAPMSCANINCL><kw/AREAPMSCANINCL/</ref>, <ref target=AREASCANEXCL><kw/AREASCANEXCL/</ref>, <ref target=AREASCANINCL><kw/AREASCANINCL/</ref> </item> <label> Example: </label> <item><eg> AREASCAN * ; Scan all areas. AREASCAN *INTER* ; Scan all areas containing INTER anywhere in the ; echoid AREASCAN INT*.* ; Scan all areas beginning with INT and ; containing a dot anywhere in the echoid</eg> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREASCANEXCL> <head> AREASCANEXCL </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREASCANEXCL/ <ident/<echoid mask>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> With this keyword you can prevent areas from being scanned with <ref target=AREASCAN><kw/AREASCAN/</ref> on startup. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The <ident/<echoid mask>/ may contain <name/4DOS/-style wildcards (<q/*/ and <q/?/). You may specify multiple masks separated with commas. If mask started with the > (greater) character, then it represent group ID. </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> This is good if you use <ref target=AREASCAN><kw/AREASCAN/</ref> to scan all areas, but have some big areas which slows it down.<lb> You can use the <ref target=AREASCANINCL><kw/AREASCANINCL/</ref> keyword to reinclude areas which have been excluded with <kw/AREASCANEXCL/. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AREAPMSCAN><kw/AREAPMSCAN/</ref>, <ref target=AREAPMSCANEXCL><kw/AREAPMSCANEXCL/</ref>, <ref target=AREAPMSCANINCL><kw/AREAPMSCANINCL/</ref>, <ref target=AREASCAN><kw/AREASCAN/</ref>, <ref target=AREASCANINCL><kw/AREASCANINCL/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREASCANINCL> <head> AREASCANINCL </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREASCANINCL/ <ident/<echoid mask>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword allows to specify areas which are to be scanned with <ref target=AREASCAN><kw/AREASCAN/</ref> even if they were excluded with <ref target=AREASCANEXCL><kw/AREASCANEXCL/</ref>. Useful for partial reversal of wildcard specs in the excludes. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The <ident/<echoid mask>/ may contain <name/4DOS/-style wildcards (<q/*/ and <q/?/). You may specify multiple masks separated with commas. If mask started with the > (greater) character, then it represent group ID. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AREAPMSCAN><kw/AREAPMSCAN/</ref>, <ref target=AREAPMSCANEXCL><kw/AREAPMSCANEXCL/</ref>, <ref target=AREAPMSCANINCL><kw/AREAPMSCANINCL/</ref> <ref target=AREASCAN><kw/AREASCAN/</ref>, <ref target=AREASCANEXCL><kw/AREASCANEXCL/</ref>, </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREASCANSORT> <head> AREASCANSORT </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREASCANSORT/ <ident/<sortspec>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> When scanning areas, <name/GoldED+/ can optimize area scanning speed if it first sorts the arealist in an order so that each msgbase format is scanned in sequence rather than on semi-random order. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The <sortspec> described in details in the <ref target=AREALISTSORT><kw/AREALISTSORT/</ref> chapter. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/XZBE/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AREALISTSORT><kw/AREALISTSORT/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREASEP> <head> AREASEP </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREASEP/ <ident><echoid> <<![ CDATA ["desc"]]>> <group> <type> <aka></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> You can define area separation lines between groups or areatypes. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> <table rows=9 cols=2> <row> <cell> <ident/echoid/ </cell> <cell> Mail area identifier. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident><![ CDATA ["desc"]]></ident> </cell> <cell> Area description in quotes. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/group/ </cell> <cell> Group ID uppercase letter (A-Z) or 0 if not in a group. Use #groupnumber to specify group numbers in the 1-999 range. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/type/ </cell> <cell> <ident/Net/, <ident/Echo/, <ident/Local/, <ident/EMail/ or <ident/News/. </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident>aka</ident> </cell> <cell> Address for the area, or <q>.</q> for the main address. </cell> </row> </table> </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> The area separation lines are implemented like a special kind of area, and are therefore sorted in the arealist just as if they were actual areas. This is also the reason why you can place the cursor bar on the separation lines. The fuzzy feature may be used to quickly go to an area group, that's why cursor can be placed on separation lines.<lb> When configuring area separation lines, be careful to consider the <ref target=AREALISTSORT><kw/AREALISTSORT/</ref>, so that the lines are sorted into the positions you want. If you don't sort areas, you must make sure that the <kw/AREASEP/ definitions are placed correctly in your configuration file, that is, between/before <ref target=AREA><kw/AREA/</ref> and <ref target=AREADEF><kw/AREADEF/</ref> lines.<lb> You will note that the separation lines are not fully connected into the left and right edges. This is both by design and for practical reasons (easier to implement), not a bug.<lb> Currently the descriptions are hardcoded to the natural location in the description column. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AREA><kw/AREA/</ref>, <ref target=AREADEF><kw/AREADEF/</ref>, <ref target=AREAFILE><kw/AREAFILE/</ref>, <ref target=AREAFILEGROUPS><kw/AREAFILEGROUPS/</ref>, <ref target=AREALISTFORMAT><kw/AREALISTFORMAT/</ref>, <ref target=AREALISTGROUPORDER><kw/AREALISTGROUPORDER/</ref>, <ref target=AREALISTSORT><kw/AREALISTSORT/</ref>, <ref target=AREATYPEORDER><kw/AREATYPEORDER/</ref> </item> <label> Example: </label> <item><eg><![ CDATA [ ; In this example areas will be separated by types AREALISTSORT TYUE AREASEP !NET "Netmail areas" 0 Net AREASEP !EMAIL "E-mail areas" 0 EMail AREASEP !ECHO "Echomail areas" 0 Echo AREASEP !NEWS "Newsgroup areas" 0 News AREASEP !LOCAL "Local areas" 0 Local]]></eg> <eg><![ CDATA [ ; And in this one areas will be separated by groups AREALISTSORT GYUE AREASEP !A "Group A" A Local AREASEP !B "Group B" B Local AREASEP !C "Group C" C Local]]></eg> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREASTART> <head> AREASTART </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREASTART/ <ident/<echoid>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Normally <name>GoldED+</name> starts by displaying the arealist, to let you select which area you want to read. If this keyword is defined, the arealist is bypassed and <name/GoldED+/ starts directly in the configured area. You can override <kw>AREASTART</kw> with the <code>-e</code> commandline switch. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The <ident/<echoid>/ parameter specifies the echo <name/GoldED+/ should start directly in. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ptr target=COMMANDLINE> chapter </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREATYPEORDER> <head> AREATYPEORDER </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREATYPEORDER/ <ident><type1> <type2> <type3> <type4> <type5></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword allows you to change the ordering of the different area types when sorted by <ref target=AREALISTSORT><kw/AREALISTSORT/</ref>. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The following types are allowed: <ident/NET/, <ident/ECHO/, <ident/LOCAL/, <ident/EMAIL/ and <ident/NEWS/. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/NET/ <ident/EMAIL/ <ident/ECHO/ <ident/NEWS/ <ident/LOCAL/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AREALISTFORMAT><kw/AREALISTFORMAT/</ref>, <ref target=AREALISTSORT><kw/AREALISTSORT/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=AREAYOUWROTETO> <head> AREAYOUWROTETO </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/AREAYOUWROTETO/ <ident/<echoid>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> <name/GoldED+/ automatically copies mails written by yourself to the given area when saving a new mail. <name/GoldED+/ will also add an <gi/AREA/ kludge so you can see from which area the mail originally is copied from. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The default destination area for the mails written by you. </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> This keyword can be used globally and in a <ref target=RANDOMSYSTEM>Random System</ref> group.<lb> The mail will not be copied if you use <!-- FIX ME!!! -->READchangemsg function. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AREACFMREPLYTO><kw/AREACFMREPLYTO/</ref>, <ref target=AREACOPYTO><kw/AREACOPYTO/</ref>, <ref target=AREAFREQTO><kw/AREAFREQTO/</ref>, <ref target=AREAREPLYTO><kw/AREAREPLYTO/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2> <head> ASKDELORIG </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/ASKDELORIG/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword allows to automatically delete mail in netmail and local area after replying on it. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If enabled, you will be asked if the message you just replied to should be deleted. Otherwise it is left untouched. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/NO/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> This keyword is only functional in netmail and local areas. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/READcommentmsg/, <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/READmovecommentmsg/, <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/READmovequotemsg/, <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/READquotemsg/, <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/READreplymsg/, <ref target=AREALISTFORMAT><kw/AREALISTFORMAT/</ref>, <ref target=AREALISTECHOMAX><kw/AREALISTECHOMAX/</ref>, <ref target=AREALISTTYPE><kw/AREALISTTYPE/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=ATTACHPATH> <head> ATTACHPATH </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/ATTACHPATH/ <ident/<path>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Defines the default path when selecting files for attachement. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The default <ident/path/ for the fileattach feature. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> chapter, <ptr target=FILESELECTION> chapter, <ref target=ATTRIBSATTACH><kw/ATTRIBSATTACH/</ref>, <ref target=EDITAUTOATTACH><kw/EDITAUTOATTACH/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=ATTRIBSATTACH> <head> ATTRIBSATTACH </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/ATTRIBSATTACH/ <ident/<attributes>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Defines the attributes that are <hi>added</hi> to the existing attributes of a message when the file attach attribute is toggled on. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> Available <ident/attributes/ are described in the <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> chapter. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <gi/LOC/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> chapter, <ref target=ATTACHPATH><kw/ATTACHPATH/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSCC><kw/ATTRIBSCC/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSCFM><kw/ATTRIBSCFM/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSECHO><kw/ATTRIBSECHO/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSEMAIL><kw/ATTRIBSEMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSFRQ><kw/ATTRIBSFRQ/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSLOCAL><kw/ATTRIBSLOCAL/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSNET><kw/ATTRIBSNET/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSNEWS><kw/ATTRIBSNEWS/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBUTES><kw/ATTRIBUTES/</ref>, <ref target=DISPATTACHSIZE><kw/DISPATTACHSIZE/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=ATTRIBSCC> <head> ATTRIBSCC </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/ATTRIBSCC/ <ident/<attributes>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Defines the default attributes of carbon copy messages. <abbr/CC/ attributes are <hi/added/ to the existing attributes of the original message. Usually used to add the <gi>K/S</gi> attribute. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> Available <ident/attributes/ are described in the <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> chapter. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <gi/LOC/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> chapter, <!-- FIX ME!!! -->Carbon Copy and Crossposting chapter, <ref target=ADDRESSMACRO><kw/ADDRESSMACRO/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSATTACH><kw/ATTRIBSATTACH/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSCFM><kw/ATTRIBSCFM/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSECHO><kw/ATTRIBSECHO/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSEMAIL><kw/ATTRIBSEMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSFRQ><kw/ATTRIBSFRQ/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSLOCAL><kw/ATTRIBSLOCAL/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSNET><kw/ATTRIBSNET/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSNEWS><kw/ATTRIBSNEWS/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBUTES><kw/ATTRIBUTES/</ref>, <ref target=CARBONCOPYLIST><kw/CARBONCOPYLIST/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=ATTRIBSCFM> <head> ATTRIBSCFM </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/ATTRIBSCFM/ <ident/<attributes>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Defines the default attributes of the confirmation receipt message. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> Available <ident/attributes/ are described in the <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> chapter. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <gi/LOC/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> Suggested attribute is: <gi/RRC/. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> chapter, <ref target=AREACFMREPLYTO><kw/AREACFMREPLYTO/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSATTACH><kw/ATTRIBSATTACH/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSCC><kw/ATTRIBSCC/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSECHO><kw/ATTRIBSECHO/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSEMAIL><kw/ATTRIBSEMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSFRQ><kw/ATTRIBSFRQ/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSLOCAL><kw/ATTRIBSLOCAL/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSNET><kw/ATTRIBSNET/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSNEWS><kw/ATTRIBSNEWS/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBUTES><kw/ATTRIBUTES/</ref>, <ref target=CONFIRMFILE><kw/CONFIRMFILE/</ref>, <ref target=CONFIRMRESPONSE><kw/CONFIRMRESPONSE/</ref>, <ref target=RCVDISABLESCFM><kw/RCVDISABLESCFM/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=ATTRIBSECHO> <head> ATTRIBSECHO </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/ATTRIBSECHO/ <ident/<attributes>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Defines the default attributes of messages entered in echomail areas. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> Available <ident/attributes/ are described in the <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> chapter. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <gi/LOC/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> chapter, <ref target=ADDRESSMACRO><kw/ADDRESSMACRO/</ref>, <ref target=AREA><kw/AREA/</ref>, <ref target=AREADEF><kw/AREADEF/</ref>, <ref target=AREADESC><kw/AREADESC/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSATTACH><kw/ATTRIBSATTACH/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSCC><kw/ATTRIBSCC/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSCFM><kw/ATTRIBSCFM/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSEMAIL><kw/ATTRIBSEMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSFRQ><kw/ATTRIBSFRQ/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSLOCAL><kw/ATTRIBSLOCAL/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSNET><kw/ATTRIBSNET/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSNEWS><kw/ATTRIBSNEWS/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBUTES><kw/ATTRIBUTES/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFOECHO><kw/CTRLINFOECHO/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=ATTRIBSEMAIL> <head> ATTRIBSEMAIL </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/ATTRIBSEMAIL/ <ident/<attributes>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Defines the default attributes of messages entered in e-mail areas. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> Available <ident/attributes/ are described in the <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> chapter. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <gi/LOC/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> chapter, <ref target=ADDRESSMACRO><kw/ADDRESSMACRO/</ref>, <ref target=AREA><kw/AREA/</ref>, <ref target=AREADEF><kw/AREADEF/</ref>, <ref target=AREADESC><kw/AREADESC/</ref>, <ref target=AREAISEMAIL><kw/AREAISEMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSATTACH><kw/ATTRIBSATTACH/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSCC><kw/ATTRIBSCC/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSCFM><kw/ATTRIBSCFM/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSECHO><kw/ATTRIBSECHO/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSFRQ><kw/ATTRIBSFRQ/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSLOCAL><kw/ATTRIBSLOCAL/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSNET><kw/ATTRIBSNET/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSNEWS><kw/ATTRIBSNEWS/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBUTES><kw/ATTRIBUTES/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFOEMAIL><kw/CTRLINFOEMAIL/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=ATTRIBSFRQ> <head> ATTRIBSFRQ </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/ATTRIBSFRQ/ <ident/<attributes>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Defines the attributes to use for messages generated with the file request function. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> Available <ident/attributes/ are described in the <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> chapter. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <gi/FRQ/ <gi/LOC/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> Suggested attributes are: <gi/PVT/ <gi>K/S</gi> <gi/CRA/. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> chapter, <ref target=ADDRESSMACRO><kw/ADDRESSMACRO/</ref>, <ref target=AREAFREQDIRECT><kw/AREAFREQDIRECT/</ref>, <ref target=AREAFREQTO><kw/AREAFREQTO/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSATTACH><kw/ATTRIBSATTACH/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSCC><kw/ATTRIBSCC/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSCFM><kw/ATTRIBSCFM/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSECHO><kw/ATTRIBSECHO/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSEMAIL><kw/ATTRIBSEMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSLOCAL><kw/ATTRIBSLOCAL/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSNET><kw/ATTRIBSNET/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSNEWS><kw/ATTRIBSNEWS/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBUTES><kw/ATTRIBUTES/</ref>, <ref target=FRQEXT><kw/FRQEXT/</ref>, <ref target=FRQNODEMAP><kw/FRQNODEMAP/</ref>, <ref target=FRQOPTIONS><kw/FRQOPTIONS/</ref>, <ref target=FRQWAZOO><kw/FRQWAZOO/</ref>, <ref target=OUTBOUNDPATH><kw/OUTBOUNDPATH/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=ATTRIBSLOCAL> <head> ATTRIBSLOCAL </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/ATTRIBSLOCAL/ <ident/<attributes>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Defines the default attributes of messages entered in local areas. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> Available <ident/attributes/ are described in the <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> chapter. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <gi/LOC/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> chapter, <ref target=ADDRESSMACRO><kw/ADDRESSMACRO/</ref>, <ref target=AREA><kw/AREA/</ref>, <ref target=AREADEF><kw/AREADEF/</ref>, <ref target=AREADESC><kw/AREADESC/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSATTACH><kw/ATTRIBSATTACH/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSCC><kw/ATTRIBSCC/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSCFM><kw/ATTRIBSCFM/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSECHO><kw/ATTRIBSECHO/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSEMAIL><kw/ATTRIBSEMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSFRQ><kw/ATTRIBSFRQ/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSNET><kw/ATTRIBSNET/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSNEWS><kw/ATTRIBSNEWS/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBUTES><kw/ATTRIBUTES/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFOLOCAL><kw/CTRLINFOLOCAL/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=ATTRIBSNET> <head> ATTRIBSNET </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/ATTRIBSNET/ <ident/<attributes>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Defines the default attributes of messages entered in netmail areas. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> Available <ident/attributes/ are described in the <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> chapter. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <gi/LOC/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> chapter, <ref target=ADDRESSMACRO><kw/ADDRESSMACRO/</ref>, <ref target=AREA><kw/AREA/</ref>, <ref target=AREADEF><kw/AREADEF/</ref>, <ref target=AREADESC><kw/AREADESC/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSATTACH><kw/ATTRIBSATTACH/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSCC><kw/ATTRIBSCC/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSCFM><kw/ATTRIBSCFM/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSECHO><kw/ATTRIBSECHO/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSEMAIL><kw/ATTRIBSEMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSFRQ><kw/ATTRIBSFRQ/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSLOCAL><kw/ATTRIBSLOCAL/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSNEWS><kw/ATTRIBSNEWS/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBUTES><kw/ATTRIBUTES/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFONET><kw/CTRLINFONET/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=ATTRIBSNEWS> <head> ATTRIBSNEWS </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/ATTRIBSNEWS/ <ident/<attributes>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Defines the default attributes of messages entered in news groups. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> Available <ident/attributes/ are described in the <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> chapter. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <gi/LOC/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> chapter, <ref target=ADDRESSMACRO><kw/ADDRESSMACRO/</ref>, <ref target=AREA><kw/AREA/</ref>, <ref target=AREADEF><kw/AREADEF/</ref>, <ref target=AREADESC><kw/AREADESC/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSATTACH><kw/ATTRIBSATTACH/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSCC><kw/ATTRIBSCC/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSCFM><kw/ATTRIBSCFM/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSECHO><kw/ATTRIBSECHO/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSEMAIL><kw/ATTRIBSEMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSFRQ><kw/ATTRIBSFRQ/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSLOCAL><kw/ATTRIBSLOCAL/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSNET><kw/ATTRIBSNET/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBUTES><kw/ATTRIBUTES/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFONEWS><kw/CTRLINFONEWS/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=ATTRIBUTES> <head> ATTRIBUTES </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/ATTRIBUTES/ <ident/<attributes>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Defines the default attributes for area members of the current <ref target=RANDOMSYSTEM>Random System</ref> group. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> Available <ident/attributes/ are described in the <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> chapter. </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> This keyword is valid <hi/ONLY/ in a <ref target=RANDOMSYSTEM>Random System</ref> group. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> chapter, <ref target=ADDRESSMACRO><kw/ADDRESSMACRO/</ref>, <ref target=AREA><kw/AREA/</ref>, <ref target=AREADEF><kw/AREADEF/</ref>, <ref target=AREADESC><kw/AREADESC/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSATTACH><kw/ATTRIBSATTACH/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSCC><kw/ATTRIBSCC/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSCFM><kw/ATTRIBSCFM/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSECHO><kw/ATTRIBSECHO/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSEMAIL><kw/ATTRIBSEMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSFRQ><kw/ATTRIBSFRQ/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSLOCAL><kw/ATTRIBSLOCAL/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSNET><kw/ATTRIBSNET/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSNEWS><kw/ATTRIBSNEWS/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFO><kw/CTRLINFO/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=BEEPCOMMENT> <head> BEEPCOMMENT </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/BEEPCOMMENT/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword enables or disables noise when the cursor in the internal editor is moved across a word defined with the <ref target=EDITCOMMENT><kw/EDITCOMMENT/</ref> keyword. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If enabled, <name/GoldED+/ will make a noise, otherwise will not. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=BEEPFACTOR><kw/BEEPFACTOR/</ref>, <ref target=BEEPLOCALMSG><kw/BEEPLOCALMSG/</ref>, <ref target=BEEPNOISES><kw/BEEPNOISES/</ref>, <ref target=BEEPYOURMAIL><kw/BEEPYOURMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=EDITCOMMENT><kw/EDITCOMMENT/</ref>, <ref target=EVENT><kw/EVENT/</ref>, <ref target=PLAY><kw/PLAY/</ref>, <ref target=SOUNDPATH><kw/SOUNDPATH/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=BEEPFACTOR> <head> BEEPFACTOR </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/BEEPFACTOR/ <ident/<value>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword allows to change the noise speed made by the <ref target=BEEPCOMMENT><kw/BEEPCOMMENT/</ref>, <ref target=BEEPLOCALMSG><kw/BEEPLOCALMSG/</ref>, <ref target=BEEPYOURMAIL><kw/BEEPYOURMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=EVENT><kw/EVENT/</ref>, and <ref target=PLAY><kw/PLAY/</ref> keywords. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The <ident/value/ specifies the constant to be used in noise speed calculation. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/1000/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> This keyword is valid <hi/ONLY/ in a <ref target=RANDOMSYSTEM>Random System</ref> group. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=BEEPCOMMENT><kw/BEEPCOMMENT/</ref>, <ref target=BEEPLOCALMSG><kw/BEEPLOCALMSG/</ref>, <ref target=BEEPNOISES><kw/BEEPNOISES/</ref>, <ref target=BEEPYOURMAIL><kw/BEEPYOURMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=EVENT><kw/EVENT/</ref>, <ref target=PLAY><kw/PLAY/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=BEEPLOCALMSG> <head> BEEPLOCALMSG </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/BEEPLOCALMSG/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword enables or disables noise when <name/GoldED+/ finds a message with the <gi/LOC/ attribute set. This can be useful for the sysop who wants to monitor the messages entered by users on his/her <abbr/BBS/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If enabled, <name/GoldED+/ will make a noise, otherwise will not. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/NO/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> chapter, <ref target=BEEPCOMMENT><kw/BEEPCOMMENT/</ref>, <ref target=BEEPFACTOR><kw/BEEPFACTOR/</ref>, <ref target=BEEPNOISES><kw/BEEPNOISES/</ref>, <ref target=BEEPYOURMAIL><kw/BEEPYOURMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=DISPLOCALHIGH><kw/DISPLOCALHIGH/</ref>, <ref target=EVENT><kw/EVENT/</ref>, <ref target=PLAY><kw/PLAY/</ref>, <ref target=SOUNDPATH><kw/SOUNDPATH/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=BEEPNOISES> <head> BEEPNOISES </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/BEEPNOISES/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This is the <hi/master switch/ for all noises in <name/GoldED+/. The <code/-m/ commandline switch overrides this option. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If enabled, <name/GoldED+/ will make a noises, otherwise will keep silence. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ptr target=COMMANDLINE> chapter, <ref target=BEEPCOMMENT><kw/BEEPCOMMENT/</ref>, <ref target=BEEPFACTOR><kw/BEEPFACTOR/</ref>, <ref target=BEEPLOCALMSG><kw/BEEPLOCALMSG/</ref>, <ref target=BEEPYOURMAIL><kw/BEEPYOURMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=EVENT><kw/EVENT/</ref>, <ref target=PLAY><kw/PLAY/</ref>, <ref target=SOUNDPATH><kw/SOUNDPATH/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=BEEPYOURMAIL> <head> BEEPYOURMAIL </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/BEEPYOURMAIL/ <ident><YES/NO/ALWAYS></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword enables or disables noise when <name/GoldED+/ finds a message to one of your <ref target=USERNAME><kw/USERNAME/</ref>'s. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/YES/, <name/GoldED+/ will make a noise if it finds a non-received message. If set to <ident/ALWAYS/, <name/GoldED+/ will make the noise even if it has already been marked as received. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=BEEPCOMMENT><kw/BEEPCOMMENT/</ref>, <ref target=BEEPFACTOR><kw/BEEPFACTOR/</ref>, <ref target=BEEPLOCALMSG><kw/BEEPLOCALMSG/</ref>, <ref target=BEEPNOISES><kw/BEEPNOISES/</ref>, <ref target=EVENT><kw/EVENT/</ref>, <ref target=PLAY><kw/PLAY/</ref>, <ref target=SOUNDPATH><kw/SOUNDPATH/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=CARBONCOPYLIST> <head> CARBONCOPYLIST </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/CARBONCOPYLIST/ <ident><KEEP/NAMES/VISIBLE/HIDDEN/REMOVE></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword specifies the format of the carbon copy list, as it will look after processing. You can also change the format in the <abbr/CC/ menu before processing. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The list specification items have the following meaning: <table rows=5 cols=2> <row> <cell> <ident/KEEP/ </cell> <cell> Keep the list as entered </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/NAMES/ </cell> <cell> Convert list to <q/CC: Name, Name, Name../ format </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/VISIBLE/ </cell> <cell> Convert list to <q/CC: Name Address/ format </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/HIDDEN/ </cell> <cell> Convert list to <q/^ACC: Name Address/ format </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/REMOVE/ </cell> <cell> Remove the list completely </cell> </row> </table> </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/NAMES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <!-- FIX ME!!! -->Carbon Copy and Crossposting chapter, <ref target=CROSSPOSTLIST><kw/CROSSPOSTLIST/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=COLOR> <head> COLOR </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/COLOR/ <ident/<colorspec>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Using this keyword you can define or redefine all the colors used in <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The detailed description for <kw/COLOR/ parameters provided in <ptr target=COLORCONFIG> chapter. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ptr target=COLORCONFIG> chapter, <ref target=COLORSET><kw/COLORSET/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=COLORSET> <head> COLORSET </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/COLORSET/ <ident><NORMAL/INTENSE/MONO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Three color setups are built-in, and can be selected with this keyword. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The <ident/NORMAL/ scheme has all black background, with bright neon-like colors for the window frames. The <ident/INTENSE/ scheme has all bright white background (this achieved by switching off the <q/blink/ attribute, thereby enabling the use of intense (bright) colors for the background (<ident/paper/) colors as well as the foreground (<ident/ink/) colors). The <ident/MONO/ scheme is optimized for the monochrome adapters. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> If color video adapter is detected then <ident/NORMAL/ color scheme used, otherwise <ident/MONO/ scheme. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ptr target=COLORCONFIG> chapter, <ref target=COLOR><kw/COLOR/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=CONFIRMFILE> <head> CONFIRMFILE </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/CONFIRMFILE/ <ident/<filename>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> <name/GoldED+/ supports the Confirmation Receipt attribute, as used in FrontDoor 2.xx with the <gi/FLAGS CFM/ kludge. If <name/GoldED+/ finds an unreceived message to one of your <ref target=USERNAME><kw/USERNAME/</ref>'s with the <gi/CFM/ (or <gi/RRQ/) attribute set, it generates an automatic response message from the content of the <kw/CONFIRMFILE/. In the file you can use many of the template tokens to personalize the automatic message. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The <ident/filename/ specifies the name of the template file used for the response message generation. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <code/golded.cfm/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> chapter, <ptr target=MESSAGETEMPLATE> chapter, <ref target=AREACFMREPLYTO><kw/AREACFMREPLYTO/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSCFM><kw/ATTRIBSCFM/</ref>, <ref target=CONFIRMRESPONSE><kw/CONFIRMRESPONSE/</ref>, <ref target=RCVDISABLESCFM><kw/RCVDISABLESCFM/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=CONFIRMRESPONSE> <head> CONFIRMRESPONSE </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/CONFIRMRESPONSE/ <ident><YES/NO/ASK></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> An unreceived message to you with the CFM attribute set tells <name/GoldED+/ that the sender has requested a receipt that you have read the message. With this keyword you tell <name/GoldED+/ what to do when such a message is found. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ tells <name/GoldED+/ to always automatically generate the receipt, <ident/NO/ cause to always ignore the requests, and if set to <ident/ASK/ you will be prompted in each case. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/ASK/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> chapter, <ref target=AREACFMREPLYTO><kw/AREACFMREPLYTO/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSCFM><kw/ATTRIBSCFM/</ref>, <ref target=CONFIRMFILE><kw/CONFIRMFILE/</ref>, <ref target=CONFIRMRESPONSE><kw/CONFIRMRESPONSE/</ref>, <ref target=RCVDISABLESCFM><kw/RCVDISABLESCFM/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2> <head> COOKIEPATH </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/COOKIEPATH/ <ident/<path>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Defines the default path for the <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/@random/ template token. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The default <ident/path/ for the <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/@random/ template token. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ref target=GOLDPATH><kw/GOLDPATH/</ref> </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ptr target=MESSAGETEMPLATE> chapter, <ref target=GOLDPATH><kw/GOLDPATH/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=CROSSPOST> <head> CROSSPOST </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/CROSSPOST/ <ident><YES/NO/ASK></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword configure prompt appearance when saving message which contains crosspost tokens in the body. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ tells <name/GoldED+/ to always automatically process crosspost tokens, <ident/NO/ cause to always ignore them, and if set to <ident/ASK/ you will be prompted in each case. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/ASK/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=CROSSPOSTLIST><kw/CROSSPOSTLIST/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=CROSSPOSTLIST> <head> CROSSPOSTLIST </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/CROSSPOSTLIST/ <ident><RAW/VERBOSE/YES/NONE></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword specifies the format of the crosspost list, as it will look after processing. You can also change the format in the <ref target=CROSSPOST><kw/CROSSPOST/</ref> menu before processing (if menu enabled). </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The list specification items have the following meaning: <table rows=4 cols=2> <row> <cell> <ident/RAW/ </cell> <cell> Keep the list as entered </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/VERBOSE/ </cell> <cell> Change the list to lines of "* Crossposted in ..." </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/YES/ </cell> <cell> Same as above, but expand echolist in line rather than in column </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/NONE/ </cell> <cell> Crosspost without a list in the msgs </cell> </row> </table> </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/VERBOSE/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <!-- FIX ME!!! -->Carbon Copy and Crossposting chapter, <ref target=CARBONCOPYLIST><kw/CARBONCOPYLIST/</ref>, <ref target=CROSSPOST><kw/CROSSPOST/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=CTRLINFO> <head> CTRLINFO </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/CTRLINFO/ <ident><YES/NO/TEARLINE,ORIGIN></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Specifies if you want a tearline and/or origin in your messages. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The tokens have the following meaning: <table rows=4 cols=2> <row> <cell> <ident/YES/ </cell> <cell> Enable both tearline and origin </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/NO/ </cell> <cell> Disable all control info </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/TEARLINE/ </cell> <cell> Enable tearline, can be used with <ident/ORIGIN/ </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/ORIGIN/ </cell> <cell> Enable origin, can be used with <ident/TEARLINE/ </cell> </row> </table> </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> This keyword is valid <hi/ONLY/ in a <ref target=RANDOMSYSTEM>Random System</ref> group.<lb> This may be helpful for <abbr/QWK/ users, who can create a group for the <abbr/QWK/ areas and disable <kw/CTRLINFO/ there. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=ATTRIBUTES><kw/ATTRIBUTES/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFOECHO><kw/CTRLINFOECHO/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFOEMAIL><kw/CTRLINFOEMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFOLOCAL><kw/CTRLINFOLOCAL/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFONET><kw/CTRLINFONET/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFONEWS><kw/CTRLINFONEWS/</ref>, <ref target=ORIGIN><kw/ORIGIN/</ref>, <ref target=TAGLINESUPPORT><kw/TAGLINESUPPORT/</ref>, <ref target=TEARLINE><kw/TEARLINE/</ref> </item> <label> Example: </label> <item><eg> CTRLINFO YES ; Add both tearline and origin CTRLINFO TEARLINE ORIGIN ; Same as above in other words CTRLINFO TEARLINE ; Add only a tearline CTRLINFO ORIGIN ; Add only an origin</eg> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=CTRLINFOECHO> <head> CTRLINFOECHO </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/CTRLINFOECHO/ <ident><YES/NO/TEARLINE,ORIGIN></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Specifies if you want a tearline and/or origin in your echomail messages. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The tokens have the following meaning: <table rows=4 cols=2> <row> <cell> <ident/YES/ </cell> <cell> Enable both tearline and origin </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/NO/ </cell> <cell> Disable all control info </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/TEARLINE/ </cell> <cell> Enable tearline, can be used with <ident/ORIGIN/ </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/ORIGIN/ </cell> <cell> Enable origin, can be used with <ident/TEARLINE/ </cell> </row> </table> </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> Changing the default may cause unpredictable behaviour with some echomail processors so it is not recommended to change it. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=ATTRIBSECHO><kw/ATTRIBSECHO/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFOECHO><kw/CTRLINFOECHO/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFOEMAIL><kw/CTRLINFOEMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFOLOCAL><kw/CTRLINFOLOCAL/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFONET><kw/CTRLINFONET/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFONEWS><kw/CTRLINFONEWS/</ref>, <ref target=ORIGIN><kw/ORIGIN/</ref>, <ref target=TAGLINESUPPORT><kw/TAGLINESUPPORT/</ref>, <ref target=TEARLINE><kw/TEARLINE/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=CTRLINFOEMAIL> <head> CTRLINFOEMAIL </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/CTRLINFOEMAIL/ <ident><YES/NO/TEARLINE,ORIGIN></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Specifies if you want a tearline and/or origin in your <name/Internet/ e-mail messages. This is not recommended. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The tokens have the following meaning: <table rows=4 cols=2> <row> <cell> <ident/YES/ </cell> <cell> Enable both tearline and origin </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/NO/ </cell> <cell> Disable all control info </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/TEARLINE/ </cell> <cell> Enable tearline, can be used with <ident/ORIGIN/ </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/ORIGIN/ </cell> <cell> Enable origin, can be used with <ident/TEARLINE/ </cell> </row> </table> </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/NO/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> Changing the default is not recommended. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=ATTRIBSEMAIL><kw/ATTRIBSEMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFOECHO><kw/CTRLINFOECHO/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFOEMAIL><kw/CTRLINFOEMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFOLOCAL><kw/CTRLINFOLOCAL/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFONET><kw/CTRLINFONET/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFONEWS><kw/CTRLINFONEWS/</ref>, <ref target=ORIGIN><kw/ORIGIN/</ref>, <ref target=TAGLINESUPPORT><kw/TAGLINESUPPORT/</ref>, <ref target=TEARLINE><kw/TEARLINE/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=CTRLINFOLOCAL> <head> CTRLINFOLOCAL </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/CTRLINFOLOCAL/ <ident><YES/NO/TEARLINE,ORIGIN></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Specifies if you want tearline and origin in your messages in local areas. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The tokens have the following meaning: <table rows=4 cols=2> <row> <cell> <ident/YES/ </cell> <cell> Enable both tearline and origin </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/NO/ </cell> <cell> Disable all control info </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/TEARLINE/ </cell> <cell> Enable tearline, can be used with <ident/ORIGIN/ </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/ORIGIN/ </cell> <cell> Enable origin, can be used with <ident/TEARLINE/ </cell> </row> </table> </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/NO/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> In local areas, the tearline and origin is normally never required but can be used for cosmetic purposes. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=ATTRIBSLOCAL><kw/ATTRIBSLOCAL/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFOECHO><kw/CTRLINFOECHO/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFOEMAIL><kw/CTRLINFOEMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFOLOCAL><kw/CTRLINFOLOCAL/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFONET><kw/CTRLINFONET/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFONEWS><kw/CTRLINFONEWS/</ref>, <ref target=ORIGIN><kw/ORIGIN/</ref>, <ref target=TAGLINESUPPORT><kw/TAGLINESUPPORT/</ref>, <ref target=TEARLINE><kw/TEARLINE/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=CTRLINFONET> <head> CTRLINFONET </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/CTRLINFONET/ <ident><YES/NO/TEARLINE,ORIGIN></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Specifies if you want tearline and origin in your netmail messages. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The tokens have the following meaning: <table rows=4 cols=2> <row> <cell> <ident/YES/ </cell> <cell> Enable both tearline and origin </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/NO/ </cell> <cell> Disable all control info </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/TEARLINE/ </cell> <cell> Enable tearline, can be used with <ident/ORIGIN/ </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/ORIGIN/ </cell> <cell> Enable origin, can be used with <ident/TEARLINE/ </cell> </row> </table> </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/TEARLINE/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> In netmail areas, the tearline and origin is normally never required but can be used for cosmetic purposes. Some robots reqire tearline in the message. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=ATTRIBSECHO><kw/ATTRIBSECHO/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFOECHO><kw/CTRLINFOECHO/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFOEMAIL><kw/CTRLINFOEMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFOLOCAL><kw/CTRLINFOLOCAL/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFONET><kw/CTRLINFONET/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFONEWS><kw/CTRLINFONEWS/</ref>, <ref target=ORIGIN><kw/ORIGIN/</ref>, <ref target=TAGLINESUPPORT><kw/TAGLINESUPPORT/</ref>, <ref target=TEARLINE><kw/TEARLINE/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=CTRLINFONEWS> <head> CTRLINFONEWS </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/CTRLINFONEWS/ <ident><YES/NO/TEARLINE,ORIGIN></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Specifies if you want a tearline and/or origin in your <name/Internet/ news articles. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The tokens have the following meaning: <table rows=4 cols=2> <row> <cell> <ident/YES/ </cell> <cell> Enable both tearline and origin </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/NO/ </cell> <cell> Disable all control info </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/TEARLINE/ </cell> <cell> Enable tearline, can be used with <ident/ORIGIN/ </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/ORIGIN/ </cell> <cell> Enable origin, can be used with <ident/TEARLINE/ </cell> </row> </table> </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/NO/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> Changing the default is not recommended. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=ATTRIBSECHO><kw/ATTRIBSECHO/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFOECHO><kw/CTRLINFOECHO/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFOEMAIL><kw/CTRLINFOEMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFOLOCAL><kw/CTRLINFOLOCAL/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFONET><kw/CTRLINFONET/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFONEWS><kw/CTRLINFONEWS/</ref>, <ref target=ORIGIN><kw/ORIGIN/</ref>, <ref target=TAGLINESUPPORT><kw/TAGLINESUPPORT/</ref>, <ref target=TEARLINE><kw/TEARLINE/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=DISPAREANO> <head> DISPAREANO </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPAREANO/ <ident><YES/NO/ALWAYS></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword specifies if <name/GoldED+/ should display the area number on the top line in the reader. The area number is the same as that displayed in the leftmost column in the arealist. This also means that the number displayed can be either the board number (Hudson/Goldbase/Ezycom board) or the standard sequential number. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> When set to <ident/YES/ <name/GoldED+/ displays area number only if non-zero, setting to <ident/NO/ disables display at all, and <ident/ALWAYS/ forces to display the area number in any case. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AREALISTNOS><kw/AREALISTNOS/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=DISPATTACHSIZE> <head> DISPATTACHSIZE </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPATTACHSIZE/ <ident><BYTES/KBYTES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Controls how the size of attached files is displayed in the header. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The following options are provided: the exact size in <ident/BYTES/, the rounded size in <ident/KBYTES/, or <ident/NO/ display at all. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/KBYTES/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> If the <ident/KBYTES/ setting is chosen, the value is rounded according to the following formula: kbytes = (bytes + 512) / 1024. So a 600 bytes file is rounded up to <q/1k/, but a 500 bytes file is rounded down to <q/0k/. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=ATTRIBSATTACH><kw/ATTRIBSATTACH/</ref>, <ref target=DISPMSGSIZE><kw/DISPMSGSIZE/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=DISPAUTONEXT> <head> DISPAUTONEXT </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPAUTONEXT/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Controls which message will be displayed when entering an area. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If enabled, <name/GoldED+/ will automatically jump to the next message when entering an area. Otherwise message under the lastread pointer will be displayed. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=MSGLISTFIRST><kw/MSGLISTFIRST/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=DISPHDRDATESET> <head> DISPHDRDATESET </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPHDRDATESET/ <ident/<position> <length>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Specifies the position and length of the date field in the header display. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> Specifies the <ident/position/ and <ident/length/ of the date field in the header display. If a negative value is specified, that value is added to the current display width. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> -20 20 </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=DISPHDRNAMESET><kw/DISPHDRNAMESET/</ref>, <ref target=DISPHDRNODESET><kw/DISPHDRNODESET/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=DISPHDRNAMESET> <head> DISPHDRNAMESET </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPHDRNAMESET/ <ident/<position> <length>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Specifies the position and length of the from/to name field in the header display. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> Specifies the <ident/position/ and <ident/length/ of the from/to name field in the header display. If a negative value is specified, that value is added to the current display width. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> 8 36 </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=DISPHDRDATESET><kw/DISPHDRDATESET/</ref>, <ref target=DISPHDRNODESET><kw/DISPHDRNODESET/</ref>, <ref target=EDITHDRNAMESET><kw/EDITHDRNAMESET/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=DISPHDRNODESET> <head> DISPHDRNODESET </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPHDRNODESET/ <ident/<position> <length>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Specfies the position and length of the from/to node address field in the header display. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> Specfies the <ident/position/ and <ident/length/ of the from/to node address field in the header display. If a negative value is specified, that value is added to the current display width. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> 44 16 </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> The attributes display moves along with the <kw>DISPHDRNODESET</kw> values. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=DISPHDRDATESET><kw/DISPHDRDATESET/</ref>, <ref target=DISPHDRNAMESET><kw/DISPHDRNAMESET/</ref>, <ref target=EDITHDRNODESET><kw/EDITHDRNODESET/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=DISPLISTCURSOR> <head> DISPLISTCURSOR </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPLISTCURSOR/ <ident><TOP/NEARTOP/MIDDLE/NEARBOTTOM/BOTTOM></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Selects the starting position of selection bar in the message list and nodelist browsers. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> <table rows=5 cols=2> <row> <cell> <ident/TOP/ </cell> <cell> At the top if possible </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/NEARTOP/ </cell> <cell> At top + 1/3 if possible </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/MIDDLE/ </cell> <cell> At middle of possible </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/NEARBOTTOM/ </cell> <cell> At bottom - 1/3 </cell> </row> <row> <cell> <ident/BOTTOM/ </cell> <cell> At bottom </cell> </row> </table> </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/MIDDLE/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=DISPLISTWRAP> <head> DISPLISTWRAP </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPLISTWRAP/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Enables or disables wrap-around when the selection bar in the main list/browser windows reaches the top or bottom. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/YES/, <name/GoldED+/ will wrap-around when the selection bar in the main list/browser windows reaches the top or bottom. If set to <ident/NO/, the selection bar will stop at the top or bottom when reaches them. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/NO/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=DISPLOCALHIGH> <head> DISPLOCALHIGH </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPLOCALHIGH/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls whether <name/GoldED+/ will display the <gi/FROM/ name with the highlight color if a message has the <gi/LOC/ attribute set. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If enabled, <name/GoldED+/ will display the <gi/FROM/ name with the highlight color if a message has the <gi/LOC/ attribute set, otherwise will not. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> chapter, <ref target=BEEPLOCALMSG><kw/BEEPLOCALMSG/</ref>, <ref target=BEEPYOURMAIL><kw/BEEPYOURMAIL/</ref>, <ref target=COLOR><kw/COLOR/</ref>, <ref target=HIGHLIGHTUNREAD><kw/HIGHLIGHTUNREAD/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=DISPMARGIN> <head> DISPMARGIN </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPMARGIN/ <ident/<width>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword defines the right margin (display width) used for message display. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If the <ident/width/ is 0 (zero), <name/GoldED+/ will default to the current screen width. If a negative value is specified, that value will be added to the current screen width (thereby decreasing the display width relative to the screen width). </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> 0 </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> If the <ref target=DISPPAGEBAR><kw/DISPPAGEBAR/</ref> keyword is enabled, the right margin is automatically decreased by one char. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <!-- FIX ME!!! -->READdecreasemargin, <!-- FIX ME!!! -->READincreasemargin, <ref target=DISPPAGEBAR><kw/DISPPAGEBAR/</ref>, <ref target=EDITQUOTEMARGIN><kw/EDITQUOTEMARGIN/</ref>, <ref target=PRINTMARGIN><kw/PRINTMARGIN/</ref>, <ref target=QUOTEMARGIN><kw/QUOTEMARGIN/</ref>, <ref target=SOUPEXPORTMARGIN><kw/SOUPEXPORTMARGIN/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=DISPMSGSIZE> <head> DISPMSGSIZE </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPMSGSIZE/ <ident><BYTES/KBYTES/LINES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> When enabled, this keyword displays the msgbody size in the lower left side of the header. The size displayed is for the message body text only, the header and NUL-terminator (and anything that may lurk beyond it) is excluded from the calculation. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The following options are provided: the exact size in <ident/BYTES/, the rounded size in <ident/KBYTES/, the number of <ident/LINES/, or <ident/NO/ display at all. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/BYTES/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> This feature only works when <hi/reading/ messages. While editing a message in the internal editor, this feature is disabled - however, the size will be displayed when you are in the save message menu (if <ref target=EDITSAVEMENU><kw/EDITSAVEMENU/</ref> is enabled).<lb> If the <ident/KBYTES/ setting is chosen, the value is rounded according to the following formula: kbytes = (bytes + 512) / 1024. So a 600 bytes file is rounded up to <q/1k/, but a 500 bytes file is rounded down to <q/0k/. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=DISPATTACHSIZE><kw/DISPATTACHSIZE/</ref>, <ref target=EDITSAVEMENU><kw/EDITSAVEMENU/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=DISPPAGEBAR> <head> DISPPAGEBAR </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPPAGEBAR/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> If enabled, a <q/pagebar/ (similar to the scrollbar in GUI's) will appear on the right margin, telling you about the relative size and position in the message you are reading. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If enabled, <name/GoldED+/ will display the pagebar, otherwise will not. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> Pagebar is only displayed if a message is longer than a screenful.<lb> The pagebar automatically decreases the <ref target=DISPMARGIN><kw/DISPMARGIN/</ref> by one char. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=AREALISTPAGEBAR><kw/AREALISTPAGEBAR/</ref>, <ref target=DISPMARGIN><kw/DISPMARGIN/</ref>, <ref target=FILELISTPAGEBAR><kw/FILELISTPAGEBAR/</ref>, <ref target=MSGLISTPAGEBAR><kw/MSGLISTPAGEBAR/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=DISPREALMSGNO> <head> DISPREALMSGNO </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPREALMSGNO/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls how the <name/GoldED+/ displays message number in the message reader. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/YES/ the actual (real) message numbers will be displayed. When set to <ident/NO/, <name/GoldED+/ will display <q/relative/ numbers, which are always sequential from msg number 1. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/NO/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> Normally the relative numbers are best, because they reflect the actual number of messages in the system. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <!-- FIX ME!!! -->READtogglerealmsgno </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=DISPSOFTCR> <head> DISPSOFTCR </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPSOFTCR/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This option controls how <name/GoldED+/ will process the so-called <gi/Soft-CR/ character (<name/ASCII/ 141, hexadecimal 8Dh) when display message containing this character. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If enabled, <name/GoldED+/ will treat the <gi/Soft-CR/ character just like any other displayable character, instead of ignoring it like linefeed chars. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/NO/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> Enabling this feature is <hi/mandatory/ to make <ref target=EDITSOFTCRXLAT><kw/EDITSOFTCRXLAT/</ref> feature working.<lb> The <name/Ezycom/ message base format requires the <gi/Soft-CR/ to terminate each line. Therefore this feature is unlikely to be useful to <name/Ezycom/ sysops.<lb> The similar functionality may be obtained by defining translation table with <gi/Soft-CR/ translated to the space character. This may be useful if you need different settings for the different areas.<lb> Note that by enabling this feature, you <hi/disable/ the character translation feature that uses the <gi/Soft-CR/ as an escape character (this applies only to so-called <q/COMPOSED/ charset). </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=EDITSOFTCRXLAT><kw/EDITSOFTCRXLAT/</ref>, <ref target=XLATIMPORT><kw/XLATIMPORT/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=DISPSTATUSLINE> <head> DISPSTATUSLINE </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPSTATUSLINE/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls statusline appearance in the <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/NO/, the statusline at the bottom will be disabled. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=STATUSLINECLOCK><kw/STATUSLINECLOCK/</ref>, <ref target=STATUSLINEHELP><kw/STATUSLINEHELP/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=DISPTABSIZE> <head> DISPTABSIZE </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPTABSIZE/ <ident/<size>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword defines the tab size (number of spaces) used when displaying the tab (<name/ASCII/ 9) character, when pressing keys assigned to <!-- FIX ME!!! -->EDITtab and <!-- FIX ME!!! -->EDITtabreverse, and when importing external data in the internal editor. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The <ident/size/ specifies tab width in the characters. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> 8 </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> If you use an external editor, you should switch it to create spaces instead of tabs, because tabs are technically not allowed in <name/FidoNet/ technology messages. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <!-- FIX ME!!! -->EDITimportquotebuf, <!-- FIX ME!!! -->EDITimporttext, <!-- FIX ME!!! -->EDITpaste, <!-- FIX ME!!! -->EDITtab, <!-- FIX ME!!! -->EDITtabreverse </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=DOSPROMPT> <head> DOSPROMPT </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DOSPROMPT/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> Controls whether <name/GoldED+/ should add a message about itself to the operating system shell prompt when shelling out. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/YES/, the <name/GoldED+/ will add the message defined with <ref target=LOADLANGUAGE><kw/MS_PROMPT/</ref> keyword in the language configuration file to the system shell. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Bugs: </label> <item> This feature is known to be broken on some platforms. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <!-- FIX ME!!! -->AREAdosshell, <!-- FIX ME!!! -->EDITdosshell, <!-- FIX ME!!! -->FILEdosshell, <!-- FIX ME!!! -->LISTdosshell, <!-- FIX ME!!! -->NODEdosshell, <!-- FIX ME!!! -->READdosshell, <ref target=EVENT><kw/EVENT/</ref>, <ref target=LOADLANGUAGE><kw/LOADLANGUAGE/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=EDITAUTOATTACH> <head> EDITAUTOATTACH </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/EDITAUTOATTACH/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> If you use drivespec (<code/C:/, <code/D:/, etc.) in the subject in a netmail message, <name/GoldED+/ can automatically turn on the file attach attribute. Autoattaching only works if the subject has been edited, so that subject files will not automatically be re-attached in replies. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/YES/ this feature is enabled, otherwise disabled. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=ATTACHPATH><kw/ATTACHPATH/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSATTACH><kw/ATTRIBSATTACH/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2> <head> EDITAUTOSAVE </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/EDITAUTOSAVE/ <ident/<seconds>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword provides the way for keeping automatic backup of the message you are writing. The saved file can be restored with the <!-- FIX ME --><kw/EDITloadfile/ command. The name of the saved file is defined with the <ref target=EDITORFILE><kw/EDITORFILE/</ref> keyword.<lb> If disaster strikes (crash, lockup, power blackout, etc.) while you are writing a message in the internal editor, this feature lets you continue from the last autosaved message, which will popup automatically when you enter the internal editor again. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If a non-zero value is given, the internal editor will automatically execute the <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/EDITsavefile/ function with intervals of <ident/seconds/. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> 30 </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> This feature only works 100% if <ref target=KEYBMODE><kw/KEYBMODE/</ref> is set to <ident/POLL/. If <ref target=KEYBMODE><kw/KEYBMODE/</ref> is set to <ident/BLOCK/, autosave won't happen until you press a key after the interval has passed. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/EDITloadfile/, <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/EDITsavefile/, <ref target=EDITORFILE><kw/EDITORFILE/</ref>, <ref target=KEYBMODE><kw/KEYBMODE/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=EDITCHANGEDATE> <head> EDITCHANGEDATE </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/EDITCHANGEDATE/ <ident><ALWAYS/YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls whether <name/GoldED+/ should change the date timestamp of the changed message. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/ALWAYS/, <name/GoldED+/ will always <q/touch/ the message date in the header after saving it. If set to <ident/YES/, <name/GoldED+/ will only <q/touch/ the message date in the header, if you change a message written by yourself. This is useful in cases such as when you need to edit messages written by other people which may be mis-addressed or something without messing up the date. If set to <ident/NO/, the message date is not changed when changing a message. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <!-- FIX ME!!! -->READchangemsg </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=EDITCHARPARA> <head> EDITCHARPARA </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/EDITCHARPARA/ <ident/[']<char>[']/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword defines the character <name/GoldED+/ will display at the end of paragraphs in the internal editor. This is where the <gi/CR/ character will be placed once the msg is saved. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The <ident/char/ defines the character <name/GoldED+/ will display at the end of paragraphs in the internal editor. The space character should be enclosed in quotes. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/' '/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> This keyword is primarily for debugging, the suggested replacement is a paragraph sign (<name/ASCII/ 20). </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=EDITCHARSPACE><kw/EDITCHARSPACE/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=EDITCHARSPACE> <head> EDITCHARSPACE </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/EDITCHARSPACE/ <ident/[']<char>[']/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword defines the character <name/GoldED+/ will display instead of a space character in the internal editor. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The <ident/char/ defines the character <name/GoldED+/ will display instead of a space character in the internal editor. The space character should be enclosed in quotes. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/' '/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> This keyword is primarily for debugging, the suggested replacement is a small dot (CP437 250). </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=EDITCHARPARA><kw/EDITCHARPARA/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=EDITCOMMENT> <head> EDITCOMMENT </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/EDITCOMMENT/ <ident><<![ CDATA ["word"]]>> <<![ CDATA ["comment"]]>></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This feature allows you to define words which causes <name/GoldED+/ to display a comment in the statusline, when you place the cursor on the word in the internal editor. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The <ident/word/ defines the substring which should cause displaying of the <ident/comment/ in the statusline. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=DISPSTATUSLINE><kw/DISPSTATUSLINE/</ref>, <ref target=STATUSLINECLOCK><kw/STATUSLINECLOCK/</ref>, <ref target=STATUSLINEHELP><kw/STATUSLINEHELP/</ref> </item> <label> Example: </label> <item><eg><![ CDATA [ EDITCOMMENT ":-(" "Don't worry, be happy!" EDITCOMMENT ":-)" "Are we having fun yet?" EDITCOMMENT ";-)" "Wink wink, nudge nugde..." EDITCOMMENT "!!!" "Flame Warning!" EDITCOMMENT "GoldED" "Great program, isn't it?" EDITCOMMENT "Odin" "One more 'n' please." EDITCOMMENT "Odinn" "That's right :-)"]]></eg> </item> </list> </div2> <div2> <head> EDITCOMPLETION </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/EDITCOMPLETION/ <ident><<![ CDATA ["abbreviation"]]>> <<![ CDATA ["completion"]]>></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword allows you to define abbreviations which will be automatically expanded to full words or sentences when typed in the internal editor. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The <ident/abbreviation/ defines the substring which should will be automatically expanded to <ident/completion/. </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> The abbreviation is case-sensitive. If <![ CDATA ["XX"]]> is defined as an abbreviation, completion will <b/not/ be triggered if <![ CDATA ["xx"]]> is typed. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/Macro/, <!-- FIX ME!!! --><kw/EDITmacro/, <ref target=DISPSTATUSLINE><kw/DISPSTATUSLINE/</ref>, <ref target=EDITCOMMENT><kw/EDITCOMMENT/</ref> </item> <label> Example: </label> <item><eg><![ CDATA [ EDITCOMPLETION "/Odin" "Odinn" EDITCOMPLETION "/GED" "GoldED" EDITCOMPLETION "/V7" "Version 7" EDITCOMPLETION "/FD" "FrontDoor" EDITCOMPLETION "/WfW" "Windows for Workgroups"]]></eg> </item> </list> </div2> <div2> <head> EDITCRLFTERM </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/EDITCRLFTERM/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls the format to be used for the paragraph line termination. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/YES/, all text paragraphs in your messages will be terminated with a <gi>CR/LF</gi> combination. If set to <ident/NO/, only a single <gi/CR/ is used. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/NO/ </item> <label> Notes: </label> <item> This option was created to fix a problem with an older version of the <name/Dutchie/ mail processor, that apparently needed the <gi>CR/LF</gi> termination of kludge lines. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> </list> </div2> <div2> <head> EDITFIELDCLEAR </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/EDITFIELDCLEAR/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls the behaviour of the input-fields, if a non-edit key is the first key pressed. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/YES/, the input-fields will be automatically cleared for new entry, if a non-edit key is the first key pressed. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> </list> </div2> <!-- finished here --> <div2> <head> EDITHARDLINE <string> </head> <p> ("<<") </p> <p> The string is needed if you use an external editor that terminates all lines with a CR or CR/LF. The hardline string acts as a text paragraph terminator, and the normal CR's are ignored. </p> <p> The concept of "hardlines" is explained in the Hardline Feature chapter. </p> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPSTATUSLINE/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls statusline appearance in the <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/NO/, the statusline at the bottom will be disabled. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=STATUSLINECLOCK><kw/STATUSLINECLOCK/</ref>, <ref target=STATUSLINEHELP><kw/STATUSLINEHELP/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2> <head> EDITHARDLINES <yes/no> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> This keyword enables the "hardline" feature. If disabled, the <kw>EDITHARDLINE</kw> string is never written to the editor message file, and the editor message file is read back exactly as entered, including terminating CR's on all lines. </p> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPSTATUSLINE/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls statusline appearance in the <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/NO/, the statusline at the bottom will be disabled. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=STATUSLINECLOCK><kw/STATUSLINECLOCK/</ref>, <ref target=STATUSLINEHELP><kw/STATUSLINEHELP/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=EDITHARDTERM> <head> EDITHARDTERM <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> If enabled, <name>GoldED+</name> will hard-terminate all lines in your messages at the editor margin. It is recommended to enable this keyword for Internet e-mail and newsgroups, because some user-unfriendly Internet software does not wrap long lines properly. But DON'T enable it in normal FidoNet echomail. </p> <p> This keyword can be used globally and in Random System groups. <ref target=DISPMARGIN><kw/DISPMARGIN/</ref>, <ref target=SOUPEXPORTMARGIN><kw/SOUPEXPORTMARGIN/</ref> </p> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPSTATUSLINE/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls statusline appearance in the <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/NO/, the statusline at the bottom will be disabled. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=STATUSLINECLOCK><kw/STATUSLINECLOCK/</ref>, <ref target=STATUSLINEHELP><kw/STATUSLINEHELP/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=EDITHDRNAMESET> <head> EDITHDRNAMESET <pos> <len> </head> <p> (8 36) </p> <p> Specfies the position and length of the from/to name field in the header edit display. If a negative value is specified, that value is added to the current display width. </p> </div2> <div2 id=EDITHDRNODESET> <head> EDITHDRNODESET <pos> <len> </head> <p> (44 36) </p> <p> Specfies the position and length of the from/to node address field in the header edit display. If a negative value is specified, that value is added to the current display width. </p> </div2> <div2 id=EDITHEADERATTRS> <head> EDITHEADERATTRS <yes/no> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> This keyword allows you to turn off the large attributes window that is shown during header edit. Even if the window is turned off, the Alt-keys are still active for toggling attributes. </p> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPSTATUSLINE/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls statusline appearance in the <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/NO/, the statusline at the bottom will be disabled. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=STATUSLINECLOCK><kw/STATUSLINECLOCK/</ref>, <ref target=STATUSLINEHELP><kw/STATUSLINEHELP/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2> <head> EDITHEADERFIRST <new,changes,replies,forwards,yes/no> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> This keyword controls the circumstances that will present you with the header editor first of all. </p> <p> New When entering a new message. Changes When changing a message Replies When making a reply. Forwards When forwarding a message. Yes Always (all of the above). No Never. </p> <p> The New, Changes, Replies and Forwards values can be combined. YES is equivalent to enabling all four of these. </p> <p> For example, we want to edit the header only when entering a new message or when changing a message: </p> <p> EDITHEADERFIRST New, Changes </p> <p> If the circumstances match the setup of this keyword, the header edit will be bypassed and you will start directly in the <kw>EDITMENU</kw> (if enabled) or in the internal or external editor. A new menu item has been added in the <kw>EDITSAVEMENU</kw>, "Edit Header", which allows you to edit the header after you have written your message, but before it is finally saved. </p> <p> If you set <kw>EDITHEADERFIRST</kw> to NO, you must either have the <kw>EDITSAVEMENU</kw> enabled, or use the internal editor, because otherwise it is not possible to edit the header at all. </p> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPSTATUSLINE/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls statusline appearance in the <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/NO/, the statusline at the bottom will be disabled. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=STATUSLINECLOCK><kw/STATUSLINECLOCK/</ref>, <ref target=STATUSLINEHELP><kw/STATUSLINEHELP/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2> <head> EDITINTERNAL <yes/no> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> Specifies if the internal editor should be the default, even if an external editor is defined. You can always change the setting in the editor menu (if <kw>EDITMENU</kw> is enabled) before you start writing your message. </p> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPSTATUSLINE/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls statusline appearance in the <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/NO/, the statusline at the bottom will be disabled. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=STATUSLINECLOCK><kw/STATUSLINECLOCK/</ref>, <ref target=STATUSLINEHELP><kw/STATUSLINEHELP/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2> <head> EDITMENU <yes/no> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> This keyword enables or disables the "Edit menu" that pops up right after you have edited the message header. If you disable the menu, you will go to the internal or external editor immediately and save a keystroke, but you will of course lose the features available from the menu, such as selection of template etc. </p> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPSTATUSLINE/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls statusline appearance in the <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/NO/, the statusline at the bottom will be disabled. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=STATUSLINECLOCK><kw/STATUSLINECLOCK/</ref>, <ref target=STATUSLINEHELP><kw/STATUSLINEHELP/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=EDITMIXCASE> <head> EDITMIXCASE <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> If this keyword is enabled, <name>GoldED+</name> will automatically format the name with uppercase the first letter in words and lowercase the rest, when entering names in the header. </p> <p> Examples: </p> <p> "odinn sorensen" or "ODINN SORENSEN" </p> <p> These would be re-cased to "Odinn Sorensen". </p> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPSTATUSLINE/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls statusline appearance in the <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/NO/, the statusline at the bottom will be disabled. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=STATUSLINECLOCK><kw/STATUSLINECLOCK/</ref>, <ref target=STATUSLINEHELP><kw/STATUSLINEHELP/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2> <head> EDITOR <commandline> [@file] [@line] </head> <p> With <name>GoldED+</name> it is possible to use your favorite text editor or even word processor to write messages. With this keyword you specify the commandline for the editor. </p> <p> If you use a word processor, be sure to make it export clean ASCII text files without control codes. </p> <p> <commandline> Program commandline. @file Token which is replaced by the editor message filename. @line Token which is replaced by the @Position template line number. </p> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPSTATUSLINE/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls statusline appearance in the <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/NO/, the statusline at the bottom will be disabled. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=STATUSLINECLOCK><kw/STATUSLINECLOCK/</ref>, <ref target=STATUSLINEHELP><kw/STATUSLINEHELP/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=EDITORFILE> <head> EDITORFILE <file> </head> <p> (GOLDED.MSG) </p> <p> Defines the name of the temporary editor message file. This file is written by <name>GoldED+</name> when swapping to the external editor, or when using the <kw>EDITsavefile</kw> command in the internal editor. </p> <p> The file is written in the GOLDPATH if there is no explicit path. </p> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPSTATUSLINE/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls statusline appearance in the <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/NO/, the statusline at the bottom will be disabled. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=STATUSLINECLOCK><kw/STATUSLINECLOCK/</ref>, <ref target=STATUSLINEHELP><kw/STATUSLINEHELP/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=EDITQUOTEMARGIN> <head> EDITQUOTEMARGIN <margin> </head> <p> (75) </p> <p> Sets the right margin for editing quoted lines in the internal editor. This should be set to the same or wider than the <kw>QUOTEMARGIN</kw>. </p> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPSTATUSLINE/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls statusline appearance in the <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/NO/, the statusline at the bottom will be disabled. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=STATUSLINECLOCK><kw/STATUSLINECLOCK/</ref>, <ref target=STATUSLINEHELP><kw/STATUSLINEHELP/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=EDITREPLYRE> <head> EDITREPLYRE <yes/no/numeric> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> If enabled, <name>GoldED+</name> inserts the "Re:" string in front of the subject when you reply to a message. If not enabled, <name>GoldED+</name> will strip any leading "Re:" when you reply to a msg. </p> <p> The "Re:" string in subjects is an obsolete practice, and today it only slows down modern replylinking software. Do yourself and others a favor and let <name>GoldED+</name> strip the Re: in your replies. </p> <p> The "numeric" option makes <name>GoldED+</name> use numeric Re:'s, of the form "Re^n:". </p> <p> This keyword can be used globally and in Random System groups. </p> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPSTATUSLINE/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls statusline appearance in the <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/NO/, the statusline at the bottom will be disabled. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=STATUSLINECLOCK><kw/STATUSLINECLOCK/</ref>, <ref target=STATUSLINEHELP><kw/STATUSLINEHELP/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=EDITSAVEMENU> <head> EDITSAVEMENU <yes/no> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> This keyword enables or disables the "Save menu" that pops up after you have edited your message in the internal or external editor. If you disable the menu, your message will be saved (or discarded if not edited) immediately and save you a keystroke, but you will also lose the features available from the menu. </p> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPSTATUSLINE/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls statusline appearance in the <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/NO/, the statusline at the bottom will be disabled. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=STATUSLINECLOCK><kw/STATUSLINECLOCK/</ref>, <ref target=STATUSLINEHELP><kw/STATUSLINEHELP/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2> <head> EDITSAVEUTIL <utilno> <"L menu text"> </head> <p> Defines the external utilities that will be added to the <kw>EDITSAVEMENU</kw> (if enabled). The menu text is inserted in the menu. The first two characters of the menu text are the "hotkey" letter that will be highlighted in the menu text, plus a space. Example: </p> <p> EDITSAVEUTIL 1 "S PGP Sign the msg" EDITSAVEUTIL 2 "l PGP Clear-Sign the msg" EDITSAVEUTIL 3 "E PGP Encrypt the msg" EDITSAVEUTIL 4 "p PGP Encrypt & Sign the msg" </p> <p> If you have changed the default language in this menu (in GOLDLANG.CFG), then make sure the highlight letters don't clash. </p> <p> With <kw>EDITSAVEUTIL</kw> definitions and <kw>EDITSAVEMENU</kw> enabled, you can directly call an external utility to do things like encoding or encrypting msgs before saving them. </p> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPSTATUSLINE/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls statusline appearance in the <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/NO/, the statusline at the bottom will be disabled. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=STATUSLINECLOCK><kw/STATUSLINECLOCK/</ref>, <ref target=STATUSLINEHELP><kw/STATUSLINEHELP/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=EDITSOFTCRXLAT> <head> EDITSOFTCRXLAT <char> </head> <p> If a translation char is defined, <name>GoldED+</name> will translate the soft-cr character (ASCII 141, HEX 8D) while saving message to base. The following example translates the soft-cr to an 'H' (for use in Russia): </p> <p> EDITSOFTCRXLAT H </p> <p> You also have to enable the <kw>DISPSOFTCR</kw> keyword. </p> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPSTATUSLINE/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls statusline appearance in the <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/NO/, the statusline at the bottom will be disabled. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=STATUSLINECLOCK><kw/STATUSLINECLOCK/</ref>, <ref target=STATUSLINEHELP><kw/STATUSLINEHELP/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2> <head> EDITSPELLCHECK <commandline> [@file] </head> <p> While in the internal editor, you can use the <kw>EDITspellcheck</kw> command to save your message to a file and shell to external spellchecking software. When the check is completed, the corrected file is read back and you can continue editing your message. The <kw>EDITspellcheck</kw> command internally uses the <kw>EDITsavefile</kw> and <kw>EDITloadfile</kw> commands. </p> <p> <commandline> Spellchecker program commandline. [@file] Token which is replaced by the message filename (defined by the <kw>EDITORFILE</kw> keyword). </p> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPSTATUSLINE/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls statusline appearance in the <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/NO/, the statusline at the bottom will be disabled. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=STATUSLINECLOCK><kw/STATUSLINECLOCK/</ref>, <ref target=STATUSLINEHELP><kw/STATUSLINEHELP/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2> <head> EDITUNDELETE <lines> </head> <p> (50) </p> <p> This keyword defines the number of lines to keep in the undelete buffer between messages. </p> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPSTATUSLINE/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls statusline appearance in the <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/NO/, the statusline at the bottom will be disabled. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=STATUSLINECLOCK><kw/STATUSLINECLOCK/</ref>, <ref target=STATUSLINEHELP><kw/STATUSLINEHELP/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2> <head> EMPTYTEARLINE <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> With this keyword enabled, <name>GoldED+</name> will always strip the tearline down to just the three dashes, "---", and instead inserts the PID (Product IDentification) kludge line, which contains the same information, but in a safer form in a safer place. The PID kludge is proposed in FidoNet document FSC-0046. </p> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPSTATUSLINE/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls statusline appearance in the <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/NO/, the statusline at the bottom will be disabled. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=STATUSLINECLOCK><kw/STATUSLINECLOCK/</ref>, <ref target=STATUSLINEHELP><kw/STATUSLINEHELP/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2> <head> ENCODEEMAILHEADERS <yes/no> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> By default headers in e-mails MIME-encoded according to RFC. In Russia it is general practice not to encode headers, so you probably want to say No here if you're in Russia ;-) This keyword supported only in -asa versions. </p> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPSTATUSLINE/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls statusline appearance in the <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/NO/, the statusline at the bottom will be disabled. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=STATUSLINECLOCK><kw/STATUSLINECLOCK/</ref>, <ref target=STATUSLINEHELP><kw/STATUSLINEHELP/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2> <head> ENDGROUP </head> <p> Ends a Random System <kw>GROUP</kw> definition. </p> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPSTATUSLINE/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls statusline appearance in the <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/NO/, the statusline at the bottom will be disabled. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=STATUSLINECLOCK><kw/STATUSLINECLOCK/</ref>, <ref target=STATUSLINEHELP><kw/STATUSLINEHELP/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=EVENT> <head> EVENT <eventtype> <eventcommand [parameters]> </head> <p> This keyword allows you to specify which soundfile to play when a specfic event occurs. The following <eventtype>'s are defined: </p> <p> EVENTTYPE TRIGGER: </p> <p> Arealist When the arealist shows. AskYesNo Any Yes/No type prompt. Attention Warnings or information popup messages. DosShell When entering a DOS or OS/2 shell. EditComment When an editcomment is found. EndOfMsgs When there are no more msgs in the area. ErrorFatal Fatal error exit. Exit Exit from <name>GoldED+</name>. JobDone Successful completion of a job. JobFailed Unsuccessful completion of a job. MsgDeleting When deleting a msg. MsgFromYou When a msg from you is found. MsgIsLocal When a msg marked Local is found. MsgIsTwit When a msg from a Twit is found. MsgToYou When a msg to you is found. SearchFailed Search operation failed. SearchSuccess Search operation was successful. Startup When the <name>GoldED+</name> startup screen shows. </p> <p> There is currently only one <eventcommand> defined: </p> <p> PLAY <filename.ext/beepnoise>. </p> <p> The parameter to PLAY can be either a sound file or one of the following standard beepnoises: </p> <p> TheEnd A high and a low note. GotIt Two sets of low-high notes. TooBad A falling note. ToYou A rising and falling note. SayBiBi A single beep. SOS Morse S O S (...---...). </p> <p> If a sound file is specified, the sound driver must support the format. </p> <p> The DOS and 386 versions need a Goldware Sound API compatible TSR or program loader which installs an interrupt service function on the multiplex interrupt 2Dh. See the chapter about the Goldware Sound API for more details. The GCTVSAPI program loader (released separately) currently only supports the CT-VOICE.DRV driver for .VOC files. </p> <p> The OS/2 version relies on MMPM/2 (using the mciSendString API call) to play the sound files. On my system with a Sound Blaster Pro, MMPM/2 plays both .WAV and (to my surprise) .VOC files. It even plays .MID files :-) </p> <p> The Win32 version uses the Win32 API to play the sound files. It should be able to play any multimedia file that Windows knows how to handle. </p> <p> Example usages: </p> <p> EVENT MsgToYou PLAY HIMAN.VOC EVENT MsgIsTwit PLAY SHOTGUN.VOC </p> <p> You have to select the sounds carefully and probably with a lot of experimentation, unless you want to turn your mailreader into a honking, wailing and farting monster and drive your poor family or yourself nuts with a cacophony of noises... </p> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPSTATUSLINE/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls statusline appearance in the <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/NO/, the statusline at the bottom will be disabled. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=STATUSLINECLOCK><kw/STATUSLINECLOCK/</ref>, <ref target=STATUSLINEHELP><kw/STATUSLINEHELP/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=EXCLUDENODES> <head> EXCLUDENODES <addressmask> </head> <p> You can define up to 50 different addressmasks to be excluded from the compiled nodelists. Use this if you are short of space, or the nodelist compile takes very long on your system. This keyword is used by GoldNODE. </p> <p> Excluded nodes can be re-included with the <kw>INCLUDENODES</kw> keyword. </p> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPSTATUSLINE/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls statusline appearance in the <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/NO/, the statusline at the bottom will be disabled. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=STATUSLINECLOCK><kw/STATUSLINECLOCK/</ref>, <ref target=STATUSLINEHELP><kw/STATUSLINEHELP/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2> <head> EXTERNOPTIONS <-options> </head> <p> Defines the default options for the <kw>EXTERNUTIL</kw>'s. Valid options: </p> <p> -Cls * Clear screen. -Cursor * Cursor in shell. -KeepCtrl * Keep control lines in the message. -Pause Pause for keypress before returning to <name>GoldED+</name>. -PauseOnError * Pause only if utility errorlevel is nonzero. -Reload * Reload the message file (@file). -Wipe Wipe editorfile and temporary file after use. </p> <p> Plus the reverse options with a "No" prefix, for example -NoCls. The default options are marked with an asterisk (*). </p> <p> Use -NoKeepCtrl when you want to clearsign a message. This will strip the control lines (kludges, tearline and origin) from the message before passing it to the external utility. The tearline and origin is appended to the message when reloading it. The default is to keep control lines in the message. </p> <p> Use -Wipe when you want the temporary unencrypted message files to be wiped and removed from the disk after they have been read into memory. <name>GoldED+</name> wipes a file by writing a block of 512 random bytes over the entire length of the file, then truncating it to zero bytes and finally deleting it. The default is not to wipe files. </p> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPSTATUSLINE/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls statusline appearance in the <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/NO/, the statusline at the bottom will be disabled. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=STATUSLINECLOCK><kw/STATUSLINECLOCK/</ref>, <ref target=STATUSLINEHELP><kw/STATUSLINEHELP/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2> <head> EXTERNUTIL <utilno> [-options] <commandline> </head> <p> This new feature can be used to "filter" msgs, for example calling PGP or other encryption utilities. </p> <p> The <utilno> must be in the range 1 to 24 for utilities that will be called with key definitions (see below). Higher numbers can be used for utilities that are called from the <kw>EDITSAVEMENU</kw> (if enabled). See the <kw>EDITSAVEUTIL</kw> keyword for details. </p> <p> The default options are those specified with the <kw>EXTERNOPTIONS</kw> keyword. With [-options], you can change the those options locally for specific utils. See the <kw>EXTERNOPTIONS</kw> keyword for a list of valid options. </p> <p> The <commandline> specfies the DOS or OS/2 commandline you want to execute. This works in the same way as for the external editor and spellchecker. See the manual for details about this, especially if you want to execute batchfiles. In the <commandline> you can use @tokens to transfer information from the msg to the commandline. The @tokens are the same as for templates, and in addition you can use two other @tokens: </p> <p> @path The GOLDPATH, including a trailing backslash. @file The full filename of the message file (GOLDED.MSG) that will be written to disk before the utility is called. @tmpfile The full filename of a temporary message file (GEDTMPxx.xxx) that will be written to disk before the utility is called. </p> <p> Examples: </p> <p> EXTERNUTIL 1 c:\4dos\4dos.com /c c:\crypt\encrypt.bat @file EXTERNUTIL 2 c:\4dos\4dos.com /c c:\crypt\decrypt.bat @file </p> <p> To call a defined external utility, you must assign a key to it. There are 24 new keyboard commands you can use in GOLDKEYS.CFG for this purpose: </p> <p> ExternUtilNN </p> <p> Where NN is in the range 01 to 24 _with_ leading zero. Examples: </p> <p> F11 ExternUtil01 F12 ExternUtil02 </p> <p> Then if you press F11, you would call external utility number 1 and so on. The <kw>ExternUtilNN</kw> keywords ONLY work in reader mode, not in the internal editor or any other place. </p> <p> HOW IT WORKS: </p> <p> 1. Just before the external utility is called, <name>GoldED+</name> writes the current message text to the GOLDED.MSG file in the GOLDPATH. The file is written as a textfile with each line CR-LF terminated. The content is exactly as you see it on the screen, which means that kludges are only included if you have enabled kludge viewing. If the -NoKeepCtrl option is used, kludges, tearline and origin are stripped before the file is written. If the token @tmpfile is used, a temporary file named GEDTMPxx.xxx (where xx.xxx is something unique) is created with exactly the same content as @file. </p> <p> 2. <name>GoldED+</name> clears the screen and then calls the utility. </p> <p> 3. The utility can now load and process the @file and/or @tmpfile, or do anything else you want. It doesn't have to have anything to do with the current msg. You could call a spreadsheet, a game, whatever. But I think this feature will mainly be used for utilities that process the @file. If the utility processes the @file, it could write the changes back to the @file. </p> <p> 4. After returning from the utility, <name>GoldED+</name> reloads the @file and displays it just as if it was the current message. For example, if your utility was a decrypter and the msg was encrypted, you would now see the decrypted msg. Neat eh? :-) </p> <p> 5. If you want to make the reloaded text permanent (save it in the msg), you can use the Change Msg function and immediately choose "Save Message" from the Editing menu (if enabled with EDITMENU Yes). This is in fact the method you could use if you wanted to EN-crypt a msg (however, it is easier to use the method which involves the EDITSAVEUTIL keyword). </p> <p> The QUOTESPACING feature can interfere with encoded msgs that include the '>' character at the beginning of lines (often seen in uuencoded msgs), by automatically inserting blank lines before and after the lines with '>'. I have therefore changed the quotespacing default from YES to NO. Be sure to check if you have a different setting if you are using an older edition of the advanced configuration files. </p> <p> If the string "-----BEGIN PGP MESSAGE-----" is found as the first 27 characters in a reloaded message, <name>GoldED+</name> will automatically add the FSC-0073 kludge "^aENC: PGP" to indicate that the message is encrypted. This kludge may be used by some software to set up alternative routing for encrypted mail which would otherwise be bounced if sent through normal channels. </p> <p> See the "Using PGP as an External Utility" chapter for batchfile examples and instructions on how to use this new feature with PGP. </p> <p> !!! IMPORTANT !!! From FidoNet Policy 4.07 (chapter 2.1.4): </p> <p> "[..] Therefore, encrypted and/or commercial traffic that is routed without the express permission of all the links in the delivery system constitutes annoying behavior." </p> <p> So be careful with this feature! </p> <p> TIP: You can use the EXTERNUTIL feature to setup keys to view or print an attached fax. Use something like this in GOLDED.CFG: </p> <p> EXTERNUTIL 11 c:\zfax\zfax.com pf @subject ; print fax EXTERNUTIL 12 c:\zfax\zfax.com vf @subject ; view fax </p> <p> And this in GOLDKEYS.CFG: </p> <p> @F11 ExternUtil11 ; Press Alt-F11 to print the fax @F12 ExternUtil12 ; Press Alt-F12 to view the fax </p> <p> Or choose your own key assignments and fax view/print utils. </p> <p> Note that this assumes that the fax file is listed in the subject line like an attached file. </p> <p> NOTE: If you're running <name>GoldED+</name>/386 and try to use a Win32 program as an EXTERNUTIL, you might get the error "This program cannot be run in DOS mode". You can work around this by calling the Win32 program via the shell. For example if this call fails: </p> <p> EXTERNUTIL 1 c:\utl\mywin32.exe @file </p> <p> Replace it with: </p> <p> EXTERNUTIL 1 command.com /c c:\utl\mywin32.exe @file </p> <p> Then it should work. If not, try using full path to command.com. </p> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPSTATUSLINE/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls statusline appearance in the <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/NO/, the statusline at the bottom will be disabled. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=STATUSLINECLOCK><kw/STATUSLINECLOCK/</ref>, <ref target=STATUSLINEHELP><kw/STATUSLINEHELP/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2> <head> EZYCOMMSGBASE <path> </head> <p> Defines the base path for the Ezycom msgbase. If not set, AREAFILE Ezycom will set it. </p> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPSTATUSLINE/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls statusline appearance in the <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/NO/, the statusline at the bottom will be disabled. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=STATUSLINECLOCK><kw/STATUSLINECLOCK/</ref>, <ref target=STATUSLINEHELP><kw/STATUSLINEHELP/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2> <head> EZYCOMUSERBASE <path> </head> <p> Defines the base path for the Ezycom userbase. If not set, AREAFILE Ezycom will set it. </p> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPSTATUSLINE/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls statusline appearance in the <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/NO/, the statusline at the bottom will be disabled. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=STATUSLINECLOCK><kw/STATUSLINECLOCK/</ref>, <ref target=STATUSLINEHELP><kw/STATUSLINEHELP/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=EZYCOMUSERNO> <head> EZYCOMUSERNO <userno> </head> <p> (0) </p> <p> Defines the lastread set used in the Ezycom message base. </p> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/DISPSTATUSLINE/ <ident><YES/NO></ident> </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This keyword controls statusline appearance in the <name/GoldED+/. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> If set to <ident/NO/, the statusline at the bottom will be disabled. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <ident/YES/ </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader. </item> <label> See also: </label> <item> <ref target=STATUSLINECLOCK><kw/STATUSLINECLOCK/</ref>, <ref target=STATUSLINEHELP><kw/STATUSLINEHELP/</ref> </item> </list> </div2> <div2> <head> FIDOHWMARKS <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> If enabled, <name>GoldED+</name> will use the echomail "highwater mark" (1.MSG) to determine if a message is "sent" or "unsent" in *.MSG areas. </p> <p> NOTE: Some older echomail processors do not update the highwater mark in a way that <name>GoldED+</name> can recognize. If all messages appear to marked "Uns", even after the mail has been scanned out, try turning off this keyword. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> FIDOLASTREAD <file> </head> <p> (LASTREAD) </p> <p> Defines the filename of the *.MSG lastread files. DO NOT specify a path. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> FIDOMSGTYPE <Opus/FTS1> </head> <p> (Opus) </p> <p> This keyword defines the default format of Fido *.MSG files. It is only used by some AREAFILE's when reading external area configuration files, where the preferred format is unknown. </p> <p> The FTS1 (FTS-0001.012 and later) format uses zone/point fields, where the Opus format uses date/time stamps. When set to Opus format, <name>GoldED+</name> interprets the date/time stamps as DOS-style bitmapped date/time. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> FIDONULLFIX <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> If set to YES, <name>GoldED+</name> will replace NUL chars with LF chars in the msg body when reading a Fido *.MSG file. This is slower of course, but not noticably on fast machines. </p> <p> This option was created to enable <name>GoldED+</name> users to read msgs that were created/handled by brain-dead programs (I don't have names, sorry) which are not obeying our primary technical standard: FTS-0001. FTS-1 states that a NUL terminates the msg body. But sometimes msgs are encountered which have a NUL as the first char in the msg body or perhaps in other places, thereby causing <name>GoldED+</name> to show a blank or cut-off msg. In some Pascal-based readers, such as FM, these msgs can be read anyway, because in Pascal a NUL does not terminate a string like in C/C++. </p> <p> NOTE: Even if the new FIDONULLFIX keyword is disabled, <name>GoldED+</name> will still fix a NUL if it is the _first_ character in the msg body. This probably fixes most of these buggy msgs without the overhead of checking the entire msg. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> FIDOUSERLIST <file> </head> <p> Path and filename of a FIDOUSER.LST file. </p> <p> This file is expected to be sorted in ascending alphabetical order using plain ASCII case-insensitive sort. Each line in the list is expected to be 60 characters plus a CR and a LF, or in other words records of 62 bytes each. If the list is produced by a nodelist compiler, everything should be okay, but be careful if you have edited the file manually. Note that a FIDOUSER.LST file only supports a name lookup (to get the address). </p> </div2> <div2 id=FIDOUSERNO> <head> FIDOUSERNO <userno> </head> <p> (0) </p> <p> This is an index into the FIDOLASTREAD file. Each user occupies 2 bytes in the lastread file. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> FILEALIAS <alias> <filename> </head> <p> Used to define short alias names for filenames. If you regularly write msgs to different files in different paths, this feature is very useful, and reduces the risk of typing wrong. </p> <p> Example: </p> <p> FILEALIAS DKB R:\DKBBS\DKBBS </p> <p> With this file alias, you can simply write "DKB" at the filename prompt, and the long filename will be used. </p> </div2> <div2 id=FILELISTPAGEBAR> <head> FILELISTPAGEBAR <yes/no> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> Enables or disables a pagebar (scrollbar) in the file attach list function. </p> </div2> <div2 id=FORCETEMPLATE> <head> FORCETEMPLATE <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> If enabled, <name>GoldED+</name> will popup a template selection menu when you start writing a new msg or reply. If you have both TEMPLATE(s) and FORCETEMPLATE in a Random System group, you can tell <name>GoldED+</name> to use the random template(s) by hitting ESC instead of selecting from the menu. </p> <p> This keyword can be used globally and in Random System groups. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> FORMFEEDSEPARATOR <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> Used when saving messages to file. If enabled, it inserts a Form Feed (12d) character after each message. </p> </div2> <div2 id=FRQEXT> <head> FRQEXT <.ext> </head> <p> With this keyword you can add extra known filename extensions for the filerequest function. The following extensions are already known by default, and need not be defined (duplicate definitions are ignored): </p> <p> .ARC .ARJ .DOC .EXE .GIF .LHA .LZH .JPG .PAK .PNG .RAR .RUN .SDA .SDN .TXT .ZIP .ZOO </p> <p> Each extension _must_ have the leading dot. </p> <p> Example: FRQEXT .XYZ </p> </div2> <div2 id=FRQNODEMAP> <head> FRQNODEMAP <to-node> <from-node> </head> <p> This keyword is used for the file request feature (Ctrl-F). It allows you to define mappings from a nodenumber used in a file announcement to another nodenumber. This is useful in the cases where a multi-line system announces files using their primary nodenumber, which may be a regular V34 modem number, but they also have an ISDN number, which you would prefer to use instead. Examples: </p> <p> // change-to: from: FRQNODEMAP 2:236/99 2:236/100 FRQNODEMAP 2:236/1043 2:236/43 </p> <p> So, if I saw a file announcement from 2:236/100, and requested some files, the request would automatically be addressed to 2:236/99. </p> </div2> <div2 id=FRQOPTIONS> <head> FRQOPTIONS <options> </head> <p> (FromTop) </p> <p> Defines options for the file request function: </p> <p> Sort Sort the list of files alphabetically. FromTop Scan the message from the top of the message. NotFromTop Scan the message from the top of the screen. NoFiles Don't list the file FILES if no files were found. NoWazooMsg Don't save the request message. Fast Bypass the header edit and save the msg immediately. </p> <p> By default, the "FromTop" option is enabled. If you often request files from very long announcement messages, you might find it very useful to set the "NotFromTop" option. </p> <p> The "NoFiles" option was added because if no filenames are found in a message, the file request function defaults to listing the magic name FILES instead of complaining that no files were found. </p> <p> If the FRQWAZOO keyword is enabled, the default behaviour is to save the request message with the FRQ attribute stripped. Use the "NoWazooMsg" option if you don't want the request message. </p> <p> Use the "Fast" option if you find that you almost never change the destination of the file request message anyway. If you enable this option, remember that you can always go over to the netmail area and change the file request message before it is sent. </p> <p> The UseFlowFile option enables a feature which was default in 2.50, but which I have been informed is problematic for modern mailers in some setups. The default is now to ONLY create/update the .REQ file and NOT also touch/create a .?LO flowfile. </p> </div2> <div2 id=FRQWAZOO> <head> FRQWAZOO <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> If enabled, <name>GoldED+</name> will create WaZOO .REQ files instead of file request messages. You must define an OUTBOUNDPATH if you enable this feature. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> GEDHANDSHAKE <yes/no> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> If this switch set to yes GoldEd displays handshake char in statusline. If you annoyed with this feature you could hide this character by setting this option to no. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> GERMANKEYBOARD <yes/no> </head> <p> (autodetect) </p> <p> This option is meanful for w32 version only. Due to right Alt key required to enter some native characters in german version of Windows it could be defined to yes for this. </p> </div2> <div2 id=GOLDBASEPATH> <head> GOLDBASEPATH <path> </head> <p> Specifies the directory where <name>GoldED+</name> can find the Goldbase msgbase files. </p> </div2> <div2 id=GOLDBASESYSPATH> <head> GOLDBASESYSPATH <path> </head> <p> Specifies the directory where <name>GoldED+</name> can find the NETMAIL.DAT and ECHOMAIL.DAT files of the Goldbase msgbase. If not specified, the GOLDBASEPATH is used. </p> </div2> <div2 id=GOLDBASEUSERNO> <head> GOLDBASEUSERNO <userno> </head> <p> (0) </p> <p> Specifies the lastread set used in the Goldbase message base. </p> </div2> <div2 id=GOLDPATH> <head> GOLDPATH <path> </head> <p> This is the path where <name>GoldED+</name> finds all it's control files. It is not necessary to define this, unless you have special needs. The GOLDPATH defaults to directory where the GOLDED.CFG file was found. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> GROUP <groupname> </head> <p> Starts a Random System group. See the Random System chapter for details. </p> </div2> <div2 id=HIGHLIGHTUNREAD> <head> HIGHLIGHTUNREAD <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> If enabled, <name>GoldED+</name> updates (increases) the "timesread" field in each message that you read. If set to NO, it doesn't touch the message. The YES setting causes a slight performance decrease, because the header of each message has to be read, the timesread field updated and the header written back to disk. The update happens immediately after the message is displayed, so you may not notice it at all. A message is only updated if the timesread field contains the value 0 (zero). </p> <p> This keyword only works in the following msgbase formats: Fido (*.MSG), Hudson, Goldbase, JAM, Squish, Ezycom and AdeptXBBS. In Squish and Ezycom, there is no timesread field, but I have annexed a reserved message attribute (in Squish, 0x00080000, now called MSGSEEN; in Ezycom, extattr 0x80) for the purpose of marking a message as read at least once. The other formats (PCBoard, WildCat) have no timesread field, but they have reserved fields or attributes which *could* be used. </p> </div2> <div2 id=HUDSONPATH> <head> HUDSONPATH <path> </head> <p> Specifies the directory where <name>GoldED+</name> can find the Hudson msgbase files. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> HUDSONSIZEWARN <size in bytes> </head> <p> (16000000) </p> <p> When the Hudson MSGTXT.BBS file exceeds this size, <name>GoldED+</name> starts to warn that the msgbase is getting dangerously close to the structural limit (which is 16MB for the MSGTXT.BBS file). With this keyword you can raise or lower the warning size in case you think the default is too low or too high. </p> </div2> <div2 id=HUDSONSYSPATH> <head> HUDSONSYSPATH <path> </head> <p> Specifies the directory where <name>GoldED+</name> can find the NETMAIL.BBS and ECHOMAIL.BBS files of the Hudson msgbase. If not specified, the HUDSONPATH is used. </p> </div2> <div2 id=HUDSONUSERNO> <head> HUDSONUSERNO <userno> </head> <p> (0) </p> <p> Specifies the lastread set used in the Hudson message base. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> IGNORECHARSET <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> If set to yes then GoldEd ignores CHRS kludges in messages thus you will be able to switch codepage in messages with inappropriate charset. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> IMPORTBEGIN <text> </head> <p> ("=== Cut ===") </p> <p> This keyword, together with IMPORTEND, defines some text to add in the beginning and end of an imported text file in the internal editor. If only IMPORTBEGIN is defined, the text is also used for the IMPORTEND. The <text> may be enclosed in quotes ("") if leading or trailing spaces are needed. The quotes are stripped. </p> <p> The replacement token "@file" can be used in the <text>. It will be replaced with the import filename as entered. </p> <p> Example: </p> <p> IMPORTBEGIN === Cut Begin: @file === IMPORTEND === Cut End === </p> </div2> <div2> <head> IMPORTEND <text> </head> <p> (same as IMPORTBEGIN) </p> <p> See IMPORTBEGIN. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> INBOUNDPATH <path> </head> <p> (defaults to GOLDPATH) </p> <p> The inbound path is currently only used with the file request feature (the READfilerequest command, <Ctrl-F>). If you use this feature, <name>GoldED+</name> will put the file descriptions into a FILES.BBS in the inbound path, ready for when the requested files are moved to the correct file areas. </p> </div2> <div2 id=INCLUDE> <head> INCLUDE </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/INCLUDE/ <ident/<filename>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> This tells the configuration file reader to stop reading the current configuration file, and start reading the file specifyed as an extra configuration source, then resume reading the previous configuration file. <kw/INCLUDE/ files can be nested without limit. </item> <label> Parameters: </label> <item> The <ident/filename/ parameter should contain absolute path and name to the configuration file. </item> <label> Processed by: </label> <item> Mail reader and nodelist compiler. </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=INCLUDENODES> <head> INCLUDENODES <addressmask> </head> <p> You can define up to 50 different addressmasks to be included from the compiled nodelists. This is only used in conjunction with the EXCLUDENODES keyword to include otherwise EXcluded nodes. This keyword is only used by GoldNODE. </p> </div2> <div2 id=INPUTFILE> <head> INPUTFILE <filename> </head> <p> (*) </p> <p> Defines the default name in the internal editor file import function. </p> <p> <name>GoldED+</name> can automatically uuencode and apply a base64 encoding to the files during importing them into the internal editor. </p> <p> NOTE: This is a very simple implementation of encoders. It cannot split large files over several messages. The file mode number 644 is hard-coded and has nothing to do with the actual file mode. </p> <p> This keyword can be used globally and in Random System groups. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> INTENSECOLORS <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> <name>GoldED+</name> is capable of switching off the "blink" color, and thereby enabling the use of bright background (paper) colors. Enable this keyword, and try out one of the intense color setup examples. </p> </div2> <div2 id=INTERNETADDRESS> <head> INTERNETADDRESS <internet-address> </head> <p> Specifies your Internet address. This must be the address only, no name. The INTERNETADDRESS and USERNAME will be combined to a standard "From: internetaddresss (username)" headerline when you write e-mail or articles. </p> <p> Example: </p> <p> USERNAME Odinn Sorensen INTERNETADDRESS odinn@ibm.net </p> <p> Produces the RFC line: </p> <p> From: odinn@ibm.net (Odinn Sorensen) </p> </div2> <div2> <head> INTERNETDOMAIN <domainname> </head> <p> (username%domain.net) </p> <p> Defines the domain-part of outgouing Message-ID's. If you don't know your full domain, leave it as default, which should work just fine. </p> </div2> <div2 id=INTERNETGATE> <head> INTERNETGATE [gatename<,>]<address> </head> <p> Defines the local Internet gate you use when sending netmail to Internet users. This option is activated when you write an Internet address in the TO: field in the header display. <name>GoldED+</name> detects the Internet address by looking for the '@' character. If detected, <name>GoldED+</name> puts the gate address from INTERNETGATE in the TO: address field. If you have defined the optional gate name (typically UUCP), <name>GoldED+</name> also replaces the typed Internet address with the gate name and puts the Internet address in a TO: line in the message body. Some gate software accepts the Internet address directly in the header, while other software may need the special (UUCP) name and a separate TO: line. Examples: </p> <p> INTERNETGATE UUCP, 1:105/42 ; Standard, with gate name INTERNETGATE 2:230/9316 ; My uplink runs GIGO software </p> <p> This keyword can be used globally in GOLDED.CFG, if you only ever use one gate, or in GROUP's for specific areas in GOLDRAND.CFG if you have multiple netmail areas and regularly use more than one gate. </p> <p> NOTE: If you enable the INTERNETRFCBODY keyword, you should always use the gatename UUCP, because otherwise the gateway software may send duplicate copies (carbon copies) of your e-mails. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> INTERNETLOOKUP <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> If set to Yes, <name>GoldED+</name> will check the systemname in the nodelist when doing a lookup and if the systemname looks like an Internet address (contains an '@' char), the msg will be addressed to that Internet address using the INTERNETGATE name/address if defined. </p> <p> For example, let's say there was something like this in the nodelist: </p> <p> ,999,somebody@somewhere,Whereever,Some_Body,... </p> <p> And this in my GOLDED.CFG: </p> <p> INTERNETLOOKUP Yes INTERNETGATE 2:230/9316 </p> <p> Then if I did a lookup of "Some Body" and selected the entry with the Internet address, <name>GoldED+</name> would make a msg looking like this: </p> <p> -------------------------------------- From : odinn@winboss.dk 2:236/77 To : somebody@somewhere 2:230/9316 Subj : whatever -------------------------------------- </p> <p> Or if my gate was defined as "INTERNETGATE UUCP 2:230/9316": </p> <p> -------------------------------------- From : odinn@winboss.dk 2:236/77 To : UUCP 2:230/9316 Subj : whatever -------------------------------------- To: somebody@somewhere </p> <p> So what's the use of all this? It allows you to make a nodelist-style list of users with Internet addresses and use it with <name>GoldED+</name> so that you can do a lookup of normal names instead of trying to remember strange Internet addresses. Of course something similar could be done using the ADDRESSMACRO's, but with the nodelist approach, you could build a "network" of users which have offline Internet access via FTN-gate software and distribute the nodelist for automatic processing. </p> </div2> <div2 id=INTERNETMSGID> <head> INTERNETMSGID <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> Specifies whether the FTN MSGID kludge should contain an RFC1036 compatible Message-ID or the normal FTS-9 format. Note that using the RFC1036 format in MSGID breaks the FTS-9 (version 001) specification, so please don't use this feature in FidoNet netmail or echomail. As a safeguard, <name>GoldED+</name> will only use the RFC1036 format in areas specifically marked as e-mail or newsgroups, using the SOUPEMAIL and SOUPNEWSRCFILE keywords or using the Email and News area types with the AREADEF keyword, even when INTERNETMSGID is set to YES globally. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> INTERNETREPLY <yes/no> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> When INTERNETREPLY is enabled, <name>GoldED+</name> always uses the FSC-35 REPLYADDR/REPLYTO kludges to gate replies to msgs from Internet correctly. If disabled, <name>GoldED+</name> only uses the FSC-35 method if the Internet address is too large to fit in the max-35-character TO: header field. Some gate software requires that the FSC-35 method is used, while other software accepts Internet addresses directly in the header. </p> </div2> <div2 id=INTERNETRFCBODY> <head> INTERNETRFCBODY <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> Tells <name>GoldED+</name> whether to look for and process RFC headerlines at the top of the message body, before the first empty line. Also tells <name>GoldED+</name> to insert its own RFC headerlines at the top of the message body instead of as kludge lines. This option should only be used when receiving Internet mail as QWK packets where the RFC headerlines are usually found at the top of the messages, or when sending Internet mail via FTN packet to a gateway running GIGO. GIGO does not recognize RFC header in kludges, but it does recognize them at the top of the messages, if it is properly configured (with lines of "Allow_Xxx:" in GIGO's HEADERS.CFG, where Xxx are the RFC headerlines the gate administrator wants to allow). </p> </div2> <div2> <head> INVALIDATE <type> <"findstring"> <"replacestring"> </head> <p> This is used to invalidate (change) certain control strings in quoted text. Use this in conjunction with old versions of D'Bridge or other software that chokes on control strings in quoted text. As an added bonus feature, if the tearline or origin is invalidated to a null string (""), they will not be quoted at all. </p> <p> The <type> can be one of the following: </p> <p> Tearline Invalidate tearline ("---"). Origin Invalidate origin (" * Origin: "). Seenby Invalidate SEEN-BY's. </p> <p> By default, the following invalidations are used: </p> <p> INVALIDATE Tearline "---" "-+-" INVALIDATE Origin " * Origin: " " + Origin: " INVALIDATE Seenby "SEEN-BY" "SEEN+BY" </p> <p> If you want to disable invalidation entirely, use this: </p> <p> INVALIDATE Tearline "---" "---" INVALIDATE Origin " * Origin: " " * Origin: " INVALIDATE Seenby "SEEN-BY" "SEEN-BY" </p> <p> The defined INVALIDATEs are also used during importing a file when editing a mail in the internal message editor. </p> </div2> <div2 id=JAMHARDDELETE> <head> JAMHARDDELETE <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> The default setting makes <name>GoldED+</name> conform to the JAMAPI specs when deleting msgs in JAM msgbases. This means that deleted msgs are only marked as such in the message header, not in the index. As a result, <name>GoldED+</name> will find and display the deleted msgs until you run a message pack utility to physically remove the deleted msgs. </p> <p> If JAMHARDDELETE is set to Yes, <name>GoldED+</name> will zap the reference to the message in the index when deleting msgs. This way the deleted msgs will not show up again later. The drawback of this approach is that it is hard to undelete msgs, and may break other software which assume 100% to-the-letter conformance to the specs. Note however, that the hard-delete method is transparent to normal use of JAM msgbases. Probably the only software that might break are undelete utilities. </p> <p> For the techies and programmers, the hard-delete method is simply setting both UserCRC and HdrOffset in the index to 0xFFFFFFFF instead of only the UserCRC. According to the JAMAPI specs, a value of 0xFFFFFFFF in HdrOffset means that "there is no corresponding message header". Sounds remarkably like a deleted msg, right? :-) </p> </div2> <div2> <head> JAMPATH <path> </head> <p> (defaults to the HUDSONPATH) </p> <p> Defines the path where <name>GoldED+</name> can access the NETMAIL/ECHOMAIL.JAM files, which are used by mail processors to find and scan out mail written by users. </p> <p> <name>GoldED+</name> can handle enviroment variables correctly in paths specified in connection with this keyword. For example, if a path is defined as %MAIL%\path\name, and SET MAIL=C:\POINT is in AUTOEXEC.BAT (or whatever), then <name>GoldED+</name> translates the path to C:\POINT\path\name. NOTE: The translation is done at config compile time, so if you change the environment variable and haven't changed anything else that would cause <name>GoldED+</name> to recompile it's config, you must force it with the -F or -FF command parameter. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> KEYBCLEAR <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> Tells <name>GoldED+</name> whether or not to clear the keyboard buffer on startup. This also clears KEYBSTACK or commandline key stuffing. In older versions of <name>GoldED+</name>, it was necessary to enable this keyword if you had renamed GOLDED.EXE to DBEDIT.EXE. This version detects the .EXE renaming and automatically enables KEYBCLEAR, regardless of the configuration setting. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> KEYBDEFAULTS <yes/no> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> <name>GoldED+</name> defines a default keyboard configuration setup internally. The keys can be reconfigured in the GOLDKEYS.CFG file. By default, the internal keyboard setup is active always, redefinable with the definitions in GOLDKEYS.CFG. But in some cases it can be preferrable that the internal keyboard setup is turned off, so that only the keys in GOLDKEYS.CFG are active. If you want this, set KEYBDEFAULTS to NO. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> KEYBEXT <yes/no> </head> <p> (detect) </p> <p> If enabled, <name>GoldED+</name> will use extended bios calls to read the keyboard. With the extended keyboard, you can use keys like <Alt-Left>, <Alt-Home> and other extended keys. If you don't have an extended keyboard, don't despair - using a few neat tricks, I have made it possible to use some of the extended keys even with a non-extended keyboard. </p> </div2> <div2 id=KEYBMODE> <head> KEYBMODE <poll/block> </head> <p> (poll) </p> <p> If this option is set to Poll, <name>GoldED+</name> switches its keyboard handling code from "blocking" to "polling" mode. This enables <name>GoldED+</name> to provide a continuously running statusline clock, automatic internal editor autosave, timeout exit and screensaver. If set to Block, the timeout exit and screensaver are disabled, and the clock and autosave are dependent on key presses. </p> <p> In order to minimize waste of CPU resources in keyboard polling mode, <name>GoldED+</name> automatically detects DESQview, Windows and OS/2 and releases timeslices during the keyboard poll. </p> </div2> <div2 id=KEYBSTACK><head>KEYBSTACK <keystring></head> <p> With this keyword, you can "stack" keys in the keyboard buffer. The KEYBSTACK can be overridden by commandline keystacking, which uses the same syntax. </p> <p> The <keystring> can be a mixture of the following: </p> <p> ^Char Ctrl-key (^Letter). ~Char Ctrl-key (~Letter). (Use this with 4DOS!). @Key Alt-key (@Number or @Letter). Char Literal character. "String" String, enclosed in double quotes. 'String' String, enclosed in single quotes. Number Keyboard scan code (decimal). ! Clear keyboard buffer. </p> <p> Whitespace (space and tab) is ignored, except in quoted strings. </p> <p> See the <ptr target=MACROSANDKEYSTACKING> chapter for more info. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> KLUDGE <kludge-definition> </head> <p> The definition may optionally be enclosed in quotes. A definition must be enclosed in quotes if it contains leading or trailing spaces. The KLUDGE tells <name>GoldED+</name> which kludges it should consider as "known" in addition to the built-in known kludges. </p> <p> Here are a bunch of examples, most of which are kludges generated by the GIGO Internet gateway software: </p> <p> KLUDGE " " ; For wrapped kludges KLUDGE "Content-Type:" KLUDGE "Date:" KLUDGE "From:" KLUDGE "In-Reply-To:" KLUDGE "Message-Id:" KLUDGE "Mime-Version:" KLUDGE "Organization:" KLUDGE "Newsgroups:" KLUDGE "Received:" KLUDGE "Reply-To:" KLUDGE "Sender:" KLUDGE "Subject:" KLUDGE "To:" KLUDGE "Errors-To:" KLUDGE "FTN-From:" ; X-FTN-From: KLUDGE "ORIGREF:" ; Gated? KLUDGE "ORIGID:" ; Gated? KLUDGE "RFC-" ; Seen in NET_DEV </p> <p> The kludges defined with KLUDGE are not case-sensitive, but when <name>GoldED+</name> looks for the kludges, it matches to the exact length. This means that for example "RFC-" will match all kludges beginning with that string. </p> <p> The ASCII 1 kludge char should not be included in the definition string, but <name>GoldED+</name> can handle it if you do. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> KLUDGECHRS <yes/no> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> If set to YES, <name>GoldED+</name> uses the "^aCHRS" kludge instead of the "^aCHARSET" kludge when appropriate. </p> </div2> <div2 id=LOADLANGUAGE> <head> LOADLANGUAGE <file> </head> <p> If defined, this keyword will load a language definition file. </p> <p> This feature can be used to load a small set of national language definitions in national areas, an english set in international areas, etc. Typically this would be used to load the definitions of the date/time strings for use in the template and the Msg/From/To/Subj strings in the header display. </p> <p> In the ADVANCED archive, a set of GEDLNG*.CFG files are provided, which are designed for use with LOADLANGUAGE. Please note that there is also a @loadlanguage template token. This way you can choose to load a language file from the template, or by using the Random System. The template token takes precedence over the LOADLANGUAGE in the Random System, but if both are defined, both will be loaded. </p> <p> This keyword can be used globally and in Random System groups, but it is probably not very useful when used globally. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> LOGFILE <file> </head> <p> (GOLDED.LOG) </p> <p> Defines the name of the <name>GoldED+</name> logfile. You should not change the default. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> LOGFORMAT <fd,max,bink,qbbs,db> </head> <p> (fd) </p> <p> Defines the log format <name>GoldED+</name> should use when writing to the logfile. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> LOOKUPECHO <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> If enabled, <name>GoldED+</name> will use nodelist lookup when entering the TO: name in msgs in echomail areas. </p> <p> <name>GoldED+</name> *won't* lookup the name if it exactly matches the current WHOTO - text. This is a feature, because a lookup of "All" is not very useful. :-) </p> </div2> <div2> <head> LOOKUPLOCAL <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> If enabled, <name>GoldED+</name> will use nodelist lookup when entering the TO: name in msgs in local areas. </p> <p> <name>GoldED+</name> *won't* lookup the name if it exactly matches the current WHOTO - text. This is a feature, because a lookup of "All" is not very useful. :-) </p> </div2> <div2> <head> LOOKUPNET <yes/no> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> If enabled, <name>GoldED+</name> will use nodelist lookup when entering the TO: name in msgs in netmail areas. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> LOOKUPUSERBASE <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> If enabled, <name>GoldED+</name> will attempt to find a matching username in the user database if a to-name with wildcards is entered in echo or local areas. </p> <p> The userbase lookup feature is not new, but a need arose for an option to turn off the lookup. I decided to let the default be to disable the lookup. Previously the lookup was always enabled. </p> </div2> <div2 id=MAILINGLIST> <head> MAILINGLIST <echoid> <senderaddress> [contribution address] </head> <p> Defines one or more mailing lists. When importing e-mail from a SOUP packet, <name>GoldED+</name> will look at the Internet address in the "Sender" header and if it matches one of the MAILINGLIST's, the e-mail will be tossed to the defined area. Note that <name>GoldED+</name> supports only participation in, not hosting of mailing lists. The contribution address is the destination Internet address for mail you write to the mailing list - the address is typically given to you when you subscribe to a list. If the contribution address is not specified, the senderaddress is assumed. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> MAILTOSS <echoid> <contribution-address> <pattern> </head> <p> This is acutally the same as MAILINGLIST in disguise with the parameters recorded and it also enables the full set of pattern matching. The <pattern> can be written exactly as if in the prompt for the advanced search feature. </p> <p> Any number of MAILTOSS lines can be given for a particular list, if there is for some reason no single way to identify the list. </p> <p> When determining the contribution address, the first MAILTOSS (or MAILINGLIST) that matches the echoid is chosen. </p> <p> MAILTOSS and MAILINGLIST can both be used at the same time and for the same lists. MAILINGLIST is always the faster, because it looks only at specific headerlines. MAILTOSS uses much more complex pattern matching and can even match based on message body content. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> MAPPATH <server filespec> <local filespec> </head> <p> This keyword is used to map paths, for example if you have different drive letters on a server machine and a workstation. You might have your FidoNet mailer and mail processor setup to run with the server drive letter (C:), but run <name>GoldED+</name> from a workstation where that drive is mapped to a different letter (J:). If you use AREAFILE's to get the area configuration for <name>GoldED+</name>, you need to use MAPPATH to map the server drive letter to the workstation equivalent. </p> <p> Another case might be that you have a setup with DOS-style paths and want to run the Linux version with the same <name>GoldED+</name> setup. You can then use MAPPATH to map the DOS drive-based paths to Unix style paths. </p> <p> Examples: </p> <p> MAPPATH C: J: MAPPATH C:\ /mnt/dos/c/ </p> <p> NOTE: You don't have to worry about backslash/forwardslash in this case - they are always mapped automatically to the correct type for the operating system. </p> </div2> <div2 id=MEMBER> <head> MEMBER <echoid> </head> <p> Defines Random System group members. See the Random System chapter for details. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> MENUDROPMSG <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> Defines the default selection in the "Drop This Msg?" menu. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> MENUMARKED <marked/current/previous/default> </head> <p> (default) </p> <p> Specifies the position of the selection bar in the Marked/Current menu. </p> <p> Marked Set selector to Marked. Current Set selector to Current. Previous Set selector to previously selection. Default Set selector to Marked if there are marked msgs. </p> <p> Note that older versions (before 2.50) used the equivalent of the "previous" setting. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> MOUSE <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> The mouse support in <name>GoldED+</name> is currently not functional, so this keyword is ignored. </p> </div2> <div2 id=MSGLISTDATE> <head> MSGLISTDATE <written/arrived/received/no> </head> <p> (written) </p> <p> Can be used globally and in groups. This keyword specifies the default date shown in the right column in the message list. If "no" is specified, the date column is removed and the space used to widen the other columns. Personally I prefer to see the "arrived" date, which is why I implemented this feature. </p> <p> The key command LISTtoggledate (Ctrl-D) toggles between them. </p> <p> Note that the "arrived" date doubles as the "processed" date for messages that are written locally and scanned out from your messagebase. </p> <p> Not all messagebase formats supports all three dates. The table below shows which messagebase supports which dates: </p> <p> Written Arrived Received JAM X X X *.MSG X X Squish X X Ezycom X X Hudson X Goldbase X PCBoard X </p> <p> If a date is not supported, "n/a" (for "not available") is shown instead. </p> </div2> <div2 id=MSGLISTFAST> <head> MSGLISTFAST <yes/no> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> The message lister can operate in two ways, fast or slow. In the fast mode, only the message headers are loaded for the list information. Depending on the msgbase format and message type, some information may not be quite the same when presented in the lister because information which is gathered from kludges or other control information in the message text will be missing. Most of the time this may not be a problem, so if you want speed, chose the fast mode (default). </p> <p> The slow mode loads and fully interprets the content of each message before the message list is presented. The slowness is most noticable when entering the lister and when paging up and down. You may want to use the slow mode for areas with Internet newsgroups and e-mail, where <name>GoldED+</name> uses the "From" kludge to get the real name of the message writer. </p> <p> This keyword can be used globally and in Random System groups. </p> </div2> <div2 id=MSGLISTFIRST> <head> MSGLISTFIRST <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> If enabled, <name>GoldED+</name> automatically starts the message lister when entering an area. </p> <p> This keyword can be used globally and in Random System groups. </p> </div2> <div2 id=MSGLISTHEADER> <head> MSGLISTHEADER <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> If enabled, <name>GoldED+</name> shows the header of the current message when you scroll the bar up and down. This is how it worked in previous versions. If disabled, <name>GoldED+</name> does not show the header and instead uses the screen space to show more messages. By eliminating the header display, it is also much faster at scrolling the list. </p> <p> This keyword can be used globally and in Random System groups. </p> </div2> <div2 id=MSGLISTPAGEBAR> <head> MSGLISTPAGEBAR <yes/no> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> Enables or disables a pagebar (scrollbar) in the message list. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> MSGLISTVIEWSUBJ <yes/no> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> If enabled, <name>GoldED+</name> will display the full subject in the bottom border of the list window. Note that this feature slows down scrolling a bit. </p> </div2> <div2 id=MSGLISTWIDESUBJ> <head> MSGLISTWIDESUBJ <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> If enabled, the Subject column is made wider by removing the To column. This is especially useful in gated Internet newsgroups, where the To name is always "All". </p> <p> You can toggle between wide and short subject with Ctrl-B (keycommand LISTtogglewidesubj). </p> <p> This keyword can be used globally and in Random System groups. </p> </div2> <div2 id=NAMESFILE> <head> NAMESFILE <file> </head> <p> (NAMES.FD) </p> <p> <name>GoldED+</name> supports the "address macro" file supported by FrontDoor and Maximus. If no path is specified, the file is first searched for in the path from the "FD" environment variable and then the GOLDPATH, if the FD variable failed. </p> <p> The address macros are added *after* those defined with the ADDRESSMACRO keyword (if any) (see this for details on the format). </p> </div2> <div2 id=NETNAME> <head> NETNAME <q/string/ </head> <!-- This is the "netname" that is placed in the originline, after the address. Example: NETNAME fidonet Produces: * Origin: Whatever (2:236/77@fidonet) This keyword can be used globally and in a Random System group. NOTE: The netname is a non-standard practice with no technical merit and should not be used. It is provided for cosmetical purposes and backward compatibility only. --> <p>dummy text</p> </div2> <div2 id=NICKNAME> <head> NICKNAME <your pseudo> </head> <p> Defines the nick name (pseudo) for the current USERNAME. Can be used globally and in random system groups. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> NODELIST <file> [zone/addr] </head> <p> Here you define up to 255 nodelists that are used by <name>GoldED+</name> and the companion nodelist compiler GoldNODE. The nodelists must generally be in the standard "St.Louis" nodelist format, but they can also contain FrontDoor/Version7 style Boss/Point extensions. The default zone is defined by the first ADDRESS or AKA, but can be overridden by adding the zone number or a full address after the filename. <name>GoldED+</name> currently needs it's own special index files to use the nodelists. These index files are created by GoldNODE. </p> <p> <file> Nodelist file. If the extension is .999 or a wildcard (".*"), the newest file with a numeric extension is used. [zone/addr] Default zone or address for the nodelist (if no zone info is present in the list itself). </p> <p> See also the USERLIST keyword, and the Nodelist Browsing chapter. </p> <p> NOTE: If you have nodelists with duplicate some of each others nodes, the nodelist with the newest or most correct entries should be placed LAST, and you should use the -D (remove duplicates) option with GoldNODE. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> NODELISTWARN <yes/no> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> If set to YES, <name>GoldED+</name> will warn you during startup if one or more nodelists are missing. Use NO to disable the warning if it bothers you or you delete/pack your nodelists when the nodelists are compiled. </p> <p> NOTE: <name>GoldED+</name> can work fine with lookups etc. without nodelists as long as it can access its own indexes (GOLDNODE.GX?). Only the extra details will be missing. </p> </div2> <div2 id=NODEPATH> <head> NODEPATH <path> </head> <p> This is where <name>GoldED+</name> and GoldNODE finds the nodelist files and indexes. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> NODEPATHFD <path> </head> <p> Path where <name>GoldED+</name> can find the FrontDoor nodelist index files. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> NODEPATHIM <path> </head> <p> Path to the InterMail nodelist index files. This is actually just an alias name of the NODEPATHFD keyword, since InterMail and FrontDoor uses the same nodelist index files. </p> </div2> <div2 id=NODEPATHV7> <head> NODEPATHV7 <path> </head> <p> Path where <name>GoldED+</name> can find the Version 7 nodelist index files. </p> <p> NOTE: For the Version 7 nodelist index support, <name>GoldED+</name> *requires* that the files SYSOP.NDX, NODEX.NDX and NODEX.DAT are present. None of these files may be missing and no other filenames are supported. Multiple sets of index files are not supported. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> NODEV7FLAGS <flag> <value> </head> <p> The Version 7 nodelist index does not by default define any nodelist flags except the CM flag. Unfortunately the V7 index does not point to the actual nodelist, it only has some bits which are marked "reserved" in the specifications. The NODEV7FLAGS keyword allows you to define the meaning of each of these bits. </p> <p> The <value> field can be a number or a bit number. Allowed numbers are: 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 8192 and 16384. Allowed bit numbers are: b5, b6, b7, b8, b9, b10, b11, b13 and b14. </p> <p> Example: </p> <p> NODEV7FLAGS MO b5 NODEV7FLAGS LO b6 NODEV7FLAGS MN b7 NODEV7FLAGS NC b8 NODEV7FLAGS ZEC b9 NODEV7FLAGS REC b10 NODEV7FLAGS NEC b11 NODEV7FLAGS XA b13 NODEV7FLAGS XX b14 </p> <p> See also the NODEV7MODEM keyword for other nodelist flags. </p> <p> The nodelist flag bits in the index files are put in by your Version 7 nodelist compiler. You must make sure that the nodelist flag definitions in your nodelist compiler setup match those in your <name>GoldED+</name> setup. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> NODEV7MODEM <type> <value> </head> <p> The Version 7 nodelist index does not by default define any nodelist modem type flags. Unfortunately the V7 index does not point to the actual nodelist, it only has some bits which are marked "reserved" in the specifications. The NODEV7MODEM keyword allows you to define the meaning of each of these bits. </p> <p> The <value> field can be a number or a bit number. Allowed numbers are: 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 and 128. Allowed bit numbers are: b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6 and b7. </p> <p> Example: </p> <p> NODEV7MODEM VFC b0 NODEV7MODEM HST b1 NODEV7MODEM V34T b2 NODEV7MODEM V32B b3 NODEV7MODEM V34 b4 NODEV7MODEM V42B b5 NODEV7MODEM ZYX b6 NODEV7MODEM ISDN b7 </p> <p> See also the NODEV7FLAGS keyword for other nodelist flags. </p> <p> The modem type bits in the index files are put in by your Version 7 nodelist compiler. You must make sure that the modem type definitions in your nodelist compiler setup match those in your <name>GoldED+</name> setup. </p> </div2> <div2 id=ORGANIZATION> <head> ORGANIZATION <text> </head> <p> Specifies the content of the RFC Organization header for Internet messages. </p> </div2> <div2 id=ORIGIN> <head> ORIGIN <"string"> </head> <p> You can define many different origins for use in <name>GoldED+</name>. You can select one of the defined origins from the Origin selection menu (the READchangeorigin keyword), which is also available from the EDITMENU and the EDITSAVEMENU. </p> <p> Leading and/or trailing spaces can be added by enclosing the origin string in quotes. </p> <p> This keyword can be used globally and in a Random System group. </p> <p> NOTE: Origins defined in the Random System will always override the global origins defined with this keyword, except when they are selected from the EDITSAVEMENU. </p> </div2> <div2 id=OUTBOUNDPATH> <head> OUTBOUNDPATH <path> </head> <p> Defines a Binkley-style outbound path. Currently only used for WaZOO .REQ file requests (see FRQWAZOO). This should be the name of your primary outbound without extension. </p> </div2> <div2 id=OUTPUTFILE> <head> OUTPUTFILE <file> </head> <p> This is the default name of the file written using the READwritemsg command. </p> <p> This keyword can be used globally and in a Random System group. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> PCBOARDPATH <path> </head> <p> Defines the default path where <name>GoldED+</name> should look for the PCBoard setup files if it can't find the PCBOARD environment variable. </p> </div2> <div2 id=PCBOARDUSERNO> <head> PCBOARDUSERNO <userno> </head> <p> (0) </p> <p> Specifies the lastread set used in the PCBoard message base. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> PERSONALMAIL <startup,allnames> </head> <p> Specifies options regarding the personal mail scan feature. None of them are enabled by default. </p> <p> If the "startup" option is used, <name>GoldED+</name> scans for personal mail while doing the startup mail scan. </p> <p> If the "allnames" option is used, <name>GoldED+</name> scans for mail to all the USERNAME's instead of only the first. The default is not to scan for personal mail at startup and to scan only for the first name. This is faster. </p> <p> Example: </p> <p> PERSONALMAIL Startup, AllNames </p> <p> The example makes <name>GoldED+</name> scan for personal mail to all your USERNAME's at startup. </p> </div2> <div2 id=PLAY> <head> PLAY <filename.ext/beepnoise> </head> <p> See the EVENT keyword for a definition of the PLAY parameters. You may specify <q/@/ before parameter for random noise selection. </p> <p> Bugs: At least one <kw/EVENT/ with file should be defined in order to initialize soundcard driver. Otherwise filenames specifyed for the <kw/PLAY/ will be ignored. </p> <p> This keyword can be used globally and in a Random System group. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> PRINTDEVICE <devicename> </head> <p> (PRN) </p> <p> Defines the name of the device used for printing. PRN is the default, but LPTx can also be used. Printers on COMx ports may also work, but this has not been tested. </p> <p> Devices are opened in Write-Only text mode. The function has been successfully tested to work with two popular peer-to-peer network packages. </p> <p> You should NOT use a filename as devicename. Use the filename option in the Write menu instead. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> PRINTFORMFEED <yes/no> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> Used when printing messages. If enabled, it prints a Form Feed (12d) character after each message. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> PRINTINIT <printstring> </head> <p> This keyword defines the command string sent to your printer to initialize it before the actual printing. </p> <p> The <printstring> can contain items like these: </p> <p> $Hex A hexadecimal string. #Decimal A decimal (integer) number. "String" Text string, enclosed in double quotes. 'String' Text string, enclosed in single quotes. Other chars Ignored. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> PRINTLENGTH <lines> </head> <p> (60) </p> <p> Defines the number of lines per page for printing. A formfeed is printed when every time PRINTLENGTH lines have been printed. </p> </div2> <div2 id=PRINTMARGIN> <head> PRINTMARGIN <characters> </head> <p> (80) </p> <p> The right margin to use in printed messages. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> PRINTRESET <printstring> </head> <p> This keyword defines the command string sent to your printer to reset it after printing. </p> <p> <printstring> See the PRINTINIT keyword. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> QUOTEBLANK <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> If enabled, <name>GoldED+</name> will put the QUOTESTRING on blank lines in the quote. Otherwise blank lines are left blank in quotes. </p> </div2> <div2 id=QUOTEBUFFILE> <head> QUOTEBUFFILE <filename> </head> <p> If used, it sets the default filename for the quotebuffer. If no path is specified, the GOLDPATH is used. </p> <p> This keyword can be used globally and in Random System groups. </p> <p> NOTE: If this keyword is used in globally (in GOLDED.CFG), it effectively disables the automatically named quotebuffers, as described in the chapter about the QUOTEBUFMODE keyword. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> QUOTEBUFMODE <ask/append/overwrite> </head> <p> (ask) </p> <p> Specifies what <name>GoldED+</name> should do, if the quotebuffer file exists already. </p> <p> Ask A menu asks you to select append/overwrite/skip. Append Always append, no asking. Overwrite Always overwrite, no asking. </p> <p> The "always overwrite" mode is not very useful I guess, but it's there if you need it. </p> <p> The quotebuffer feature automatically creates special filenames for the buffer file, using these guidelines: </p> <p> FORMAT FILENAME LOCATION Fido GOLDED.QBF In the directory with the *.MSG's. Hudson GOLDHxxx.QBF In the HUDSONPATH. Squish filename.QBF Where the Squish area is. Ezycom GLDxxxxx.QBF In the EZYCOMMSGPATH. JAM filename.QBF Where the JAM area is. Goldbase GOLDGxxx.QBF In the GOLDBASEPATH. PCBoard filename.QBF Where the PCBoard area is. </p> <p> Note that they all have extension .QBF so that you can easily find them. </p> </div2> <div2 id=QUOTECHARS> <head> QUOTECHARS ["]<chars>["] </head> <p> Defines up to 10 chars to recognize in addition to '>' as quote string chars. This is most useful in gated Internet newsgroups, where chars such as '|', ':' and ';' are sometimes used instead of the '>'. </p> <p> This keyword can be used globally and in Random System groups. </p> <p> Example: </p> <p> Group Internet: Member alt.*, comp.*, net.email Quotechars "|:;" Username odinn@winboss.dk EndGroup </p> <p> The example is similar to the one I use myself (net.email is a local netmail area where I import my gated e-mail from winboss.dk). The username is my actual Internet address. </p> <p> Note that using additional quotechars such as '|' and ':' may cause odd results when quoting in the cases when they are actually NOT used in a message as quotechars. Consider for example quoting a smiley :-) </p> </div2> <div2 id=QUOTECTRL> <head> QUOTECTRL <Tearline,Origin,yes/no> </head> <p> Specifies if you want quote tearline and/or origin in your messages. </p> <p> This keyword can be used in random system groups. </p> </div2> <div2 id=QUOTEMARGIN> <head> QUOTEMARGIN <chars> </head> <p> (70) </p> <p> The margin to which quotes are wrapped. A negative value means that the negative value is added to the DISPMARGIN (not recommended). </p> </div2> <div2> <head> QUOTESPACING <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> If enabled, <name>GoldED+</name> will automatically add blank lines before and after a block of quoted text, if none are present already. This improves the readability of some messages. </p> </div2> <div2 id=QUOTESTOPS> <head> QUOTESTOPS </head> <list type=gloss> <label> Synopsis: </label> <item> <kw/QUOTESTOPS/ <ident/<string>/ </item> <label> Description: </label> <item> If one of characters defined by this keyword found before quotechar then line will be not treated as quote. </item> <label> Default: </label> <item> <![ CDATA ["<\"'-"]]> </item> </list> </div2> <div2 id=QUOTESTRING> <head> QUOTESTRING <quotespec> </head> <p> (" FL> ") </p> <p> With this keyword you define how you want the quotestring to look in your quoted replies. </p> <p> The <quotespec> can contain these characters: </p> <p> F Replaced with the first letter of the first name. M Replaced with the letters of the middle names. L Replaced with the first letter of the last name. > Required quote-char. Spaces Cosmetics. </p> <p> Other characters are allowed but *not* recommended. </p> <p> This keyword can be used globally and in Random System Groups. </p> </div2> <div2 id=QUOTEWRAPHARD> <head> QUOTEWRAPHARD <yes/no> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> This keyword controls behaviour of quoted text (wrap or reflow). </p> </div2> <div2> <head> QWKBADMSGS <echoid> </head> <p> Specifies the area where messages in unknown conferences are put. If you get messages tossed here by accident, you must move them manually to the correct area. If the badmsgs area is not defined, the messages will silently disappear. Messages tossed to the badmsgs area will have the control line "AREA:<bbsid>_<confno>" at the top of the message. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> QWKCONFMAP <bbsid> ["]<confname>["] <echoid> </head> <p> Defines the mapping between the BBSID and conference names in the QWK packets and the echoid name of the conference as required by <name>GoldED+</name>. You MUST define a mapping for every conference that you subscribe to. If you don't, the messages will be tossed to the area defined by QWKBADMSGS or disappear. The <bbsid> is the name listed on line 5 in CONTROL.DAT after the comma. The <confname> is the conference names listed on line 13 and on alternate lines onwards in CONTROL.DAT. If a conference name contains embedded spaces, the <confname> must be enclosed in double quotes, like this: "Main Board". The area <echoid> must be already defined either in an AREAFILE or using the AREADEF or AREA keywords. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> QWKEXPORTPATH <path> </head> <p> Path where outgoing QWK reply files (BBSID.MSG) can be placed. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> QWKIMPORTPATH <path> </head> <p> Path where incoming QWK packet files (CONTROL.DAT and MESSAGES.DAT) can be found. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> QWKOPTIONS <bbsid> <options> </head> <p> The <bbsid> is the BBSID (same as the name of the QWK packet) for which the options will be active. The <options> can be any or a combination of the following, separated by commas or spaces: </p> <p> KLUDGES/NOKLUDGES: Defaults to NOKLUDGES. Specifies whether or not to include the FidoNet-style kludges at the top of messages when exporting to QWK. NOTE: Unless you enable this option, <name>GoldED+</name> will *not* include kludges in your QWK packets. You should check if the BBS supports kludges in QWK packets. If it does, please enable this option. </p> <p> MIXCASE/NOMIXCASE: Defaults to NOMIXCASE. Specifies whether or not the BBS allows mixed upper/lower case in the QWK message headers. The default is to uppercase the TO and FROM header fields when exporting to QWK packets. </p> <p> RECEIPT/NORECEIPT: Defaults to NORECEIPT. Specifies whether or not the BBS supports return receipt requests (RRQ). If the RECEIPT option is enabled, <name>GoldED+</name> will insert "RRR" at the front of the subject field if the RRQ attribute is set on your messages, when exporting to QWK packets. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> QWKREPLYLINKER <cmd> </head> <p> Commandline for a replylinker program to call after QWK import. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> QWKTOSSLOG <file> </head> <p> Name of a file where <name>GoldED+</name> puts the echoids of each area where articles have been imported. The tosslog file is intended to be used with a replylinker. If no path is given, it defaults to the GOLDPATH. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> RA2USERSBBS <yes/no> </head> <p> (detect) </p> <p> <name>GoldED+</name> supports the two different formats of the Hudson USERS.BBS file. With this keyword you can tell <name>GoldED+</name> which format to use. </p> <p> If set to YES, the RA2 format is used. Otherwise if the it is set to NO, the Hudson format is used. </p> <p> If this keyword is NOT used, <name>GoldED+</name> tries to detect the format by looking at the size of the USERS.BBS file and comparing this to the record sizes of the RA2 and Hudson formats. </p> <p> If the size matches one and not the other, the format is detected to be of the matching type. </p> <p> If the size matches both (which is quite normal), <name>GoldED+</name> looks for the RA environment variable and if found, in the RA config files for the RA version. </p> <p> If the size does not match either of them (indicating a possibly damaged userfile), <name>GoldED+</name> exits with an error message and writes in the log with details of the problem and an advise to run a userbase packing utility. </p> <p> If used, this keyword should be placed in the configuration file _after_ any AREAFILE keyword. </p> </div2> <div2 id=RCVDISABLESCFM> <head> RCVDISABLESCFM <yes/no> </head> <p> (yes) If this keyword defined to "no" then GoldEd will recognize RRq (receipt request) and/or CFM (confirmation) flag on messages with RCV (received) flag set. After that RRq and CFM flags will be resetted. It is useful if your netmail tracker sets RCV flag before you actually read messages. <ptr target=MESSAGEATTRS> chapter, <ref target=AREACFMREPLYTO><kw/AREACFMREPLYTO/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBSCFM><kw/ATTRIBSCFM/</ref>, <ref target=CONFIRMFILE><kw/CONFIRMFILE/</ref>, <ref target=CONFIRMRESPONSE><kw/CONFIRMRESPONSE/</ref> </p> </div2> <div2> <head> REGISTERKEY </head> <p> </div2> <div2> <head> REGISTERNAME </head> <p> These keywords do nothing and won't do anything in the future. They were used when <name>GoldED+</name> was a Shareware product. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> REM </head> <p> This keyword ignores everything behind it. This is useful to comment a single line out. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> REPLYLINK <chain/direct> </head> <p> Defaults to "direct" for JAM and "chain" for everything else. </p> <p> If set to "direct", <name>GoldED+</name> will link your reply directly to the original message. If set to "chain", it will link to the last message in the reply chain. The default ("chain") is how <name>GoldED+</name> has done it in all previous versions. </p> <p> The advantage of the "direct" linking method is that you can easily find the the original message the reply was for. Unless of course you have later re-linked using a chain-linking replylinker utility. I can recommend the utility SQLINK by Serge Terekhov. SQLINK links Squish areas using the MSGID/REPLY kludges and makes direct links instead of chain-linking on the subject line like most other replylinkers do. There are probably also similar replylinkers for other msgbase formats, I just don't know them. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> REPLYLINKLIST <fast/full> </head> <p> (fast) </p> <p> When there is more than one reply to a msg in a JAM or Squish area, <name>GoldED+</name> pops up a list of the replies. This keyword affects the contents of the list. </p> <p> In the "fast" mode, the list data is based solely on what can be found by reading the message header, which is quite fast. Unfortunately some software does not (or cannot) fill the header with the correct origination address. In that case, set this keyword to "full", which makes <name>GoldED+</name> read and scan each message for control data to get the origination address. That can be very slow. </p> </div2> <div2 id=ROBOTNAME> <head> ROBOTNAME <name> </head> <p> A "robot" is a program on the Boss or Uplink system which responds automatically to netmail messages. Usually the robot links or unlinks echomail areas or distributed files. </p> <p> The following ROBOTNAME's are defined by default: </p> <p> AreaFix, AreaMgr, FileFix, AreaLink, AllFix, Raid, GEcho. </p> <p> If you write a netmail message where the TO: name is one of the robot names, <name>GoldED+</name> will ignore any template definition, and give you a blank msg (possibly with a tearline) to edit. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> SCREENBLANKER <seconds> [BLACK] </head> <p> (180) </p> <p> If non-zero, <name>GoldED+</name> will blank the screen after the defined number of seconds, and put a small moving window up instead. Hitting any key (including shiftkeys) will return the screen to normal. If zero, no blanking is done. </p> <p> If the additional parameter "BLACK" is given, <name>GoldED+</name> will switch the screen completely black instead of showing its own animated screenblanker. This is useful if you have a monitor with powersaving-features. </p> <p> Example: </p> <p> SCREENBLANKER 300 BLACK </p> <p> NOTE: This feature only works if KEYBMODE is set to "poll". </p> </div2> <div2> <head> SCREENMAXCOL <columns> </head> <p> (0) </p> <p> On some systems, <name>GoldED+</name> may no detect the correct display size. With this keyword you can force a specific size. If zero, autodetect is used. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> SCREENMAXROW <rows> </head> <p> (0) </p> <p> On some systems, <name>GoldED+</name> may not detect the correct display size. With this keyword you can force a specific size. If zero, autodetect is used. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> SCREENPALETTE <reg> <value> OR <reg> (red green blue) </head> <p> You can change the color palette used in <name>GoldED+</name>. The palette has 16 color registers, corresponding to the 16 colors from black (0) to intense white (15). By changing the values in the palette registers, it is possible to make any of the 16 colors a completely different color. You can even make the background colors intense, without using the intense color feature. There are 64 different colors to chose from. </p> <p> To configure the palette colors in <name>GoldED+</name>, the SCREENPALETTE keyword is used. There are two different syntaxes: </p> <p> SCREENPALETTE <reg> <value> SCREENPALETTE <reg> (red green blue) </p> <p> So you can either compose the color value using separate red, green, blue components, or directly use a precalculated value. The red/green/blue values can only be in the range 0-3. </p> <p> These are the original palette values: </p> <p> SCREENPALETTE 0 (0 0 0) SCREENPALETTE 1 (0 0 2) SCREENPALETTE 2 (0 2 0) SCREENPALETTE 3 (0 2 2) SCREENPALETTE 4 (2 0 0) SCREENPALETTE 5 (2 0 2) SCREENPALETTE 6 (2 2 0) SCREENPALETTE 7 (2 2 2) SCREENPALETTE 8 (1 1 1) SCREENPALETTE 9 (1 1 3) SCREENPALETTE 10 (1 3 1) SCREENPALETTE 11 (1 3 3) SCREENPALETTE 12 (3 1 1) SCREENPALETTE 13 (3 1 3) SCREENPALETTE 14 (3 3 0) SCREENPALETTE 15 (3 3 3) </p> <p> Copy these lines into your GOLDED.CFG and start experimenting! :-) </p> <p> If you have written a program to edit the palette and write a <name>GoldED+</name> palette setup file, please don't keep it a secret! :-) </p> </div2> <div2> <head> SCREENSHADOWS <yes/no> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> If enabled, all relevant windows and menus in <name>GoldED+</name> will have shadows. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> SCREENSIZE <mode> </head> <p> (Auto) </p> <p> Use this to force <name>GoldED+</name> to use either 25 lines, 43/50 lines on EGA/VGA, or even special videomodes supported by your SuperVGA adapter (modes like 132x44, 100x40 or 80x60). </p> <p> The <mode> can be one of the following: </p> <p> Auto Use detected size. 25 Switch to 25 lines. 28 Switch to 28 lines. 4350 Switch to 43/50 lines. Mode <NN> Switch to videomode NN (a hexadecimal value). </p> <p> Please check your video adapter manual carefully before trying out the Mode option. SELECTING A WRONG MODE CAN DAMAGE YOUR MONITOR!!! </p> <p> The Mode option is ignored in the W32 and OS/2 version. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> SCREENUSEBIOS <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> If enabled, <name>GoldED+</name> will use standard BIOS calls for screen updates. This is VERY slow, and should only be used if really needed. Normally <name>GoldED+</name> uses direct screen writes. </p> <p> This feature is only interpreted in the DOS version. </p> </div2> <div2 id=SEARCHFOR> <head> SEARCHFOR ["]<string|string|..>["] </head> <p> Defines a set of search strings, separated by the '|' character. The search set defined here is the default when using the Alt-F/Z search functions or the marking system. </p> <p> The '|' character works like an OR operator. That is, the search is successful if one OR more of the strings are matched. The '&' character is used as the logical AND operator. </p> <p> Please refer to appropriate section in user's guide for more information. </p> <p> Older versions used the ';' semicolon character as a separator, but that conflicts with the config reader which treats the semicolon in a special way. The semicolon is still accepted as separator char like '|', but if semicolons are used, you MUST enclose the search strings with quotes or the config reader will treat the first semicolon as the start of a comment. </p> <p> Examples: </p> <p> SEARCHFOR string1 SEARCHFOR string1|string2|stringx SEARCHFOR "string1;string2;stringx" SEARCHFOR "string 1"|string2&stringx </p> <p> This keyword can be used globally and in Random System groups. </p> </div2> <div2 id=SEMAPHORE> <head> SEMAPHORE <type> <file> </head> <p> This keyword defines "semaphore" files, for use with other mailer and/or mail processing software. </p> <p> The <type> can be one of the following: </p> <p> NETSCAN Empty netmail scan file (for D'Bridge/FD). ECHOSCAN Empty echomail scan file (for D'Bridge). EXPORTLIST Echoid-list of your new messages. IMPORTLIST Echoid-list of new imported messages. </p> <p> The semaphore files are placed in the AREAPATH, if no path is specified. </p> <p> See the example .CFG files for typical semaphore filenames. </p> <p> NOTE: You should not set SEMAPHORE EXPORTLIST to %JAMPATH%\ECHOMAIL.JAM. This is incorrect and probably may cause your mail processor to malfunction. Use the JAMPATH keyword instead. </p> <p> <name>GoldED+</name> can handle enviroment variables correctly in paths specified in connection with this keyword. For example, if a path is defined as %MAIL%\path\name, and SET MAIL=C:\POINT is in AUTOEXEC.BAT (or whatever), then <name>GoldED+</name> translates the path to C:\POINT\path\name. </p> <p> NOTE: The translation is done at config compile time, so if you change the environment variable and haven't changed anything else that would cause <name>GoldED+</name> to recompile it's config, you must force it with the -F or -FF command parameter. </p> <p> In addition, <name>GoldED+</name> itself can watch for some semaphore files and execute the appropiate function if it is in the arealist screen. This can be useful if you have a multitasking system and you want to "tell" <name>GoldED+</name> that there is new mail in some areas and <name>GoldED+</name> should update its display correctly. </p> <p> In detail, there are </p> <p> EXITNOW <file> Quit immediately. SCANALL <file> Scan all areas SCANNETMAIL <file> Scan all netmail areas SCANTHIS <file> Scan the areas listed in the file PMSCANALL <file> PM-scan all areas PMSCANNETMAIL <file> PM-scan all netmail areas PMSCANTHIS <file> PM-scan the areas listed in the file QWKIMPORT <file> Import QWK packets QWKEXPORT <file> Export to QWK SOUPIMPORT <file> Import SOUP packets SOUPEXPORT <file> Export to SOUP IDLETIME <seconds> Number of seconds between checks </p> <p> If SEMAPHORE IDLETIME is defined and non-zero, then <name>GoldED+</name> will check this list of semaphore files when the user has not pressed a key in the specified number of seconds. The semaphores are only checked when the arealist screen is active. If a semaphore file is found, the file is deleted and then the action is performed. If no path is given for the files, the GOLDPATH is assumed. </p> <p> Example: </p> <p> SEMAPHORE SCANALL SCANALL.NOW SEMAPHORE IDLETIME 30 </p> <p> This causes <name>GoldED+</name> to check every 30 seconds for the SCANALL.NOW file in the GOLDPATH, and scan all areas if it's found. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> SERIALNO </head> <p> Everything mentioned above about REGISTERKEY and REGISTERNAME applied to this keyword. </p> </div2> <div2 id=SHAREMODE><head>SHAREMODE <yes/no/mode#></head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> If enabled, <name>GoldED+</name> opens all files in a SHARE.EXE compatible mode. </p> <p> The default share-mode is "Share Deny None", but another may be specified directly if you give the mode number as the keyword parameter (decimal). </p> <p> It is normally not necessary to change the default. </p> </div2> <div2 id=SOUNDPATH> <head> SOUNDPATH <path> </head> <p> (defaults to the GOLDPATH) </p> <p> Tells <name>GoldED+</name> where to find the sound files for the PLAY and EVENT keywords. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> SOUPBADMSGS <echoid> </head> <p> Specifies the area where "bad messages" from SOUP packets can be tossed. It should be an echomail or newsgroup area. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> SOUPEMAIL <echoid> </head> <p> Specifies the area where Internet e-mails can be tossed. It must be a netmail or e-mail area. </p> </div2> <div2 id=SOUPEXPORTMARGIN> <head> SOUPEXPORTMARGIN <margin> </head> <p> (76) </p> <p> This is the margin that <name>GoldED+</name> will hard-wrap to when exporting to SOUP packets. If you're getting complaints that your lines are too long, you may want to set this to 70 or 60. </p> <p> NOTE: You should NOT enable EDITHARDTERM in email and newsgroups that are exported to SOUP. If you do, your messages will probably be exported with short line "droppings" after the wrapping margin. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> SOUPEXPORTPATH <path> </head> <p> Path where outgoing SOUP reply packet files (REPLIES and GOLD*.MSG) can be placed. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> SOUPIMPORTPATH <path> </head> <p> Path where the incoming SOUP packet files (AREAS and *.MSG) can be found. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> SOUPNEWSRCFILE <file> </head> <p> Name with full path of the NEWSRC file which lists the newsgroups you are connected to. <name>GoldED+</name> uses the list to mark the matching areas as newsgroups. These will then be scanned for outgoing mail when starting a SOUP export. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> SOUPREPLYLINKER <cmd> </head> <p> Commandline for a replylinker program to call after SOUP import. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> SOUPREPLYTO <internet-address> </head> <p> Internet-Address other users should use when they respond to your mails (Reply-To Headerline). </p> </div2> <div2> <head> SOUPTOSSLOG <file> </head> <p> Name of a file where <name>GoldED+</name> puts the echoids (newsgroup names) of each area where articles have been imported. The tosslog file is intended to be used with a replylinker. If no path is given, it defaults to the GOLDPATH. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> SQUISHDIRECT <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> If enabled, then in Squish areas, if the DIR (direct) attribute is set on a message, <name>GoldED+</name> will automatically set both the CRA (crash) and HLD (hold) attributes when saving the message. </p> <p> According to the Squish Developers Kit, this is the way to tell SquishMail that a message should be routed direct, because SquishMail does not recognize the FLAGS kludge where the DIR attribute is normally found. This keyword should probably only be used with SquishMail (the mail processor) and then only when used with Binkley or other so-called "static" mailers. DON'T use it with FrontDoor! </p> </div2> <div2> <head> SQUISHSCAN <api/quick> </head> <p> (quick) </p> <p> Specfies whether to use a quick scanning method which only looks in the .SQI files. This will normally work fine, but may fail slightly in obscure cases, especially when used with Squish 1.0x or programs using the old version of the MSGAPI. If you suspect problems, try to set this keyword to "api", which tells <name>GoldED+</name> to look in the .SQD file for an exact count of active msgs in the .SQI file. </p> <p> NOTE: <name>GoldED+</name> does NOT use the original MSGAPI by Scott Dudley. Since version 2.50, a completely rewritten implementation is used. </p> </div2> <div2 id=SQUISHUSERNO> <head> SQUISHUSERNO <index> </head> <p> (0) </p> <p> This sets the lastread index number for the Squish *.SQL lastread files. Lowest number is 0 (zero), highest is (in theory) 65534. </p> <p> If used, this disables the use of USER.BBS to find the index number, and will in effect also stop <name>GoldED+</name> from creating USER.BBS or any new entries in it (useful in a single-user point system). If a Squish msgbase is shared between several users, and you don't want to have a USER.BBS (recommended in such a case), each user must have a unique SQUISHUSERNO in their GOLDED/GOLDAREA.CFG. </p> </div2> <div2 id=SQUISHUSERPATH> <head> SQUISHUSERPATH <path>[file] </head> <p> This keyword defines the path where <name>GoldED+</name> can find and use/create your USER.BBS file, which is used in connection with the Squish area lastreads. You can also specify the exact filename if not USER.BBS. </p> <p> If this path or filename is not defined, <name>GoldED+</name> will instead take the one specified with AREAFILE Squish or AREAFILE Maximus (whichever comes first), or failing that, use the MAXIMUS or SQUISH environment variables. If even that fails, the AREAPATH or GOLDPATH is used. If AREAFILE Maximus is used, <name>GoldED+</name> gets the filename from MAX.PRM. </p> </div2> <div2 id=STATUSLINECLOCK> <head> STATUSLINECLOCK <yes/no> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> If enabled, <name>GoldED+</name> will display a clock in HH:MM:SS format in the right side of the statusline. </p> <p> You can redefine the clock format with the language keyword ST_STATUSLINETIMEFMT in GOLDLANG.CFG. See the Language Definition chapter to details about the date/time codes you can use. </p> <p> NOTE: The clock will only run continuously if KEYBMODE is set to "poll". </p> </div2> <div2 id=STATUSLINEHELP> <head> STATUSLINEHELP <yes/no/nologo> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> If set to YES, <name>GoldED+</name> will replace the "logo" in the left side of the statusline with a text saying "F1 Help". This is for use in "point package" setups where the user may be a complete novice, maybe even to computers, and who needs to be guided to the help screens. The "F1 Help" text is configurable with the ST_STATUSLINEHELP language keyword (put it in GOLDLANG.CFG). </p> <p> If set to NO, <name>GoldED+</name> will display it's logo (name and version) in the left side of the statusline. </p> <p> If set to NOLOGO, <name>GoldED+</name> will not display anything in the left side. The middle part is extended to fill the space on the left side. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> STYLECODES <yes/hide/no> </head> <p> (hide) </p> <p> If enabled (yes or hide), <name>GoldED+</name> will highlight text surrounded by one of the following characters in a different color: '*' for bold text, '/' for italic text, '_' for underlined text and '#' for reversed text. These are commonly used "stylecodes" which add emphasis to the text, without making it harder to read. Examples: *This* will be shown in bold color, /this/ in italic color and _this_ in underlined color. It is also possible to combine styles, such as */this/*, in bolditalic color. </p> <p> The differ in yes and hide is that hide strips surrounding stylecodes. </p> <p> Described values are specific to -asa. Official vesions starting at 3.00beta3 has bug in implementation which causes GoldEd to ignore this keyword. Realization of this keyword in -asa versions compatible with official versions prior to 3.00beta3. </p> <p> To define the highlight colors, use COLOR STYLECODE. See the color chapter for details. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> STYLECODEPUNCT <"charlist"> </head> <p> (<q>!\"$%&()+,.:;<=>@[\]^`{|}~</q>) </div2> <div2> <head> STYLECODESTOPS <"charlist"> </head> <p> ("") </p> <p> The STYLECODEPUNCT keyword specifies all the characters that punctuates words. The stylecode line parser scans forward until it meets one of these characters and then looks back to see if it found a word with stylecodes around it. </p> <p> The STYLECODESTOPS keyword specifies characters which, if found within the word to be highlighted, causes the highlight to be cancelled. </p> <p> These keywords were added to allow users to experiment with the characters for punctuation and stop for stylecode sequences. This is mostly to illustrate the point that it is almost impossible to make stylecodes work in every case you want without getting a lot of false highlights too. Please keep in mind that stylecodes are, and always will be, a primitive and very error-prone method for adding highlights to message text. The defaults are: </p> <p> STYLECODEPUNCT <q>!\"$%&()+,.:;<=>@[\]^`{|}~</q> STYLECODESTOPS <q></q> </p> <p> Note that the double-quote (") must have the backslash (\) in front of it - the sequence (\") is translated to a single ("). </p> </div2> <div2 id=TAGLINE> <head> TAGLINE <string or filename> </head> <p> Defines one or more taglines. A tagline collection filename can be specified if prepended with an '@' character, like this: TAGLINE @TAGLINE.LST. If a tagline collection file is used, <name>GoldED+</name> will create an index file for it the first time it is used or any time the file is edited. The index file has the same name, but extension ".SDX". The index file is an array of 32-bit long integers, containing the offset of each line in the tagline collection file. </p> <p> This keyword can be used globally and in a Random System group. </p> <p> Taglines defined in the Random System *always* overrides the default global taglines defined with this keyword. </p> </div2> <div2 id=TAGLINECHAR> <head> TAGLINECHAR <char> </head> <p> ('.') </p> <p> Defines the character <name>GoldED+</name> uses when putting a tagline in your message. The default is '.'. You should not change this default. <name>GoldED+</name> itself only recognizes taglines with '.' or '_' (underscore). </p> </div2> <div2 id=TAGLINESUPPORT> <head> TAGLINESUPPORT <yes/no> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> Allows you to turn off the internal tagline support, in case it turns out to be too buggy or if you want to use one of the many good external tagline utilties out there instead. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> TASKTITLE <string> </head> <p> (@longpid) </p> <p> Sets window title in Win32 and OS/2 versions, ignored in other. </p> </div2> <div2 id=TEARLINE> <head> TEARLINE <string> </head> <p> (@longpid @version) </p> <p> Here you can define your default tearline. The tearline can be up to 76 chars long (excluding the leading "--- "), but beware that policies (such as FidoNet ECHOPOL1) may set a significantly lower limit (around 30). </p> <p> This keyword can be used globally and in a Random System group. </p> <p> Tearlines defined in the Random System *always* overrides the default tearline defined with this keyword. </p> <p> If your tearline does not contain at least the string "GoldED" or "GED", <name>GoldED+</name> will automatically insert it's PID kludge. See also description of USEPID keyword. </p> </div2> <div2 id=TEMPLATE> <head> TEMPLATE <file> ["desc"] [match-address] </head> <p> (GOLDED.TPL) </p> <p> You can define many different template files. The templates can be switched using the READchangetemplate (Ctrl-T) popup menu or the EDITMENU. </p> <p> The optional "desc" can be used to give the templates more meaningful names like "International template" instead of non-obvious names like "GOLDED.TPL". If a description is used, it must appear before the match-address. It must always be enclosed in quotes, even if it is only one word. </p> <p> The match-address is an address mask (wildcards allowed) which can be used to tell <name>GoldED+</name> to select that template if the destination address on a message you write matches the match-address. The matching will only take place if the TEMPLATEMATCH keyword has been enabled. </p> <p> This keyword can be used globally and in a Random System group. In Random System groups, only the <file> parameter can be used. </p> <p> Templates defined in Random System groups always override the globally defined templates, except when selected from the EDITMENU or when automatic template matching is in effect. </p> <p> To override the automatic template matching, start by selecting a template manually using the READchangetemplate (Ctrl-T) command or the EDITMENU. </p> <p> Currently only one match-address per template can be specified, but you can specify several TEMPLATE keywords for the same file. </p> <p> Example: </p> <p> // Use DANSK.TPL for messages to Danish nodes/points. TEMPLATE DANSK.TPL "Danish" 2:23/* TEMPLATE DANSK.TPL "Danish" 2:234/* TEMPLATE DANSK.TPL "Danish" 2:235/* TEMPLATE DANSK.TPL "Danish" 2:236/* TEMPLATE DANSK.TPL "Danish" 2:237/* TEMPLATE DANSK.TPL "Danish" 2:238/* </p> <p> // Use INTERNET.TPL for messages to the WinBoss gateway TEMPLATE INTERNET.TPL "Internet" 2:230/9316 </p> <p> // Use ENGLISH.TPL for messages to everywhere else TEMPLATE ENGLISH.TPL "English" * </p> </div2> <div2 id=TEMPLATEMATCH> <head> TEMPLATEMATCH <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> If enabled, <name>GoldED+</name> will select a template which matches the destination address on messages that you write. This keyword can be used globally or in random system groups. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> TEMPLATEPATH <path> </head> <p> (defaults to the GOLDPATH) </p> <p> Defines the default path for msg templates. Use this if you want to place templates in a path separate from the GOLDPATH. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> TEMPPATH <path> </head> <p> Defines the directory where temporary files are placed by <name>GoldED+</name> and GoldNODE. </p> <p> This path should *NOT* point to a RAM disk or other volatile media! </p> <p> GoldNODE uses this path to store a temporary file which can become as large as the largest index file (GOLDNODE.GXN), so again, don't point it to a small RAM disk. If GoldNODE cannot find a TEMPPATH, it will use the NODEPATH instead. </p> </div2> <div2 id=TIMEOUT><head>TIMEOUT <seconds></head> <p> (0) </p> <p> Similar to the screen blanking (SCREENBLANKER) feature, <name>GoldED+</name> can auto-exit after a specified period of time. Useful if you are in a hurry (or didn't get enough sleep last night ;-), and run <name>GoldED+</name> from your mailer shell. The timeout value can be overridden with the -T commandline option. </p> <p> NOTE: This feature only works if KEYBMODE is set to "poll". </p> </div2> <div2> <head> TIMEOUTSAVEMSG <yes/no> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> If set to YES, <name>GoldED+</name> behaves as usual: It saves the (perhaps partially written) msg text in the internal editor to the msgbase and exits. If set to NO, <name>GoldED+</name> will save the msg text in GOLDED.MSG just as if EDITAUTOSAVE function was in use and the power went out. Next time you started <name>GoldED+</name> and entered a msg, it would detect the "lost" msg and ask you if it should be continued. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> TITLESTATUS <yes/no> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> If enabled then brief status will be added to title. (Win32 and OS/2 versions only) </p> </div2> <div2 id=TWITMODE> <head> TWITMODE <mode> </head> <p> (Blank) </p> <p> In <name>GoldED+</name> you can define several "Twit" names, addresses or subjects. With this keyword you can specify the action taken when a Twit message is encountered. </p> <p> The <mode> can be one of the following: </p> <p> Show Show twit messages. Blank Blank twit messages. Skip Skip twit messages, unless to your USERNAME's. Ignore Skip twit messages, always. Kill Deletes twit messages, *without* confirmation! </p> <p> This keyword can be used globally and in a Random System group. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> TWITNAME <name/address> </head> <p> With this keyword, you can specify "Twit" names and/or addresses. When a Twit name/address is detected, the TWITMODE setting will determine the action taken. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> TWITSUBJ <"string"> </head> <p> With this keyword, you can specify "Twit" subjects. When a Twit subject is detected, the TWITMODE setting will determine the action taken. The subject string is searched in the entire subject text, so you can specify a partial twit subject. Twit subjects are limited to maximum 35 characters. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> TWITTO <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> If enabled, <name>GoldED+</name> will check both from- and to-names when checking for twitnames. By default only the from-names are checked. </p> <p> This is a global keyword and won't work as intended if used in a random system group. </p> </div2> <div2 id=UNPACKER> <head> UNPACKER </head> <p> Added ability to READ packed messagebases. You need to add PKD attribute to such echo definition and specify UNPACKER for the extension defined. You should pack all files from the single messagebase to the archive with the same name. For *.msg areas you should add the directory as well. When entering to the archived area UNPACKER will be executed to unpack files to TEMPPATH. On exit, all files will be deleted. New UNPACKER keyword have the following syntax: UNPACKER >extension< ><q/commandline/< The commandline should provide the ability to extract all files from @file.<extension> to the current directory. F.e.: UNPACKER zip <q/unzip @file/ Note that all changes to the messagebase will be discarded. This feature is not supported for Hudson and GoldBase messagebases. </p> </div2> <div2 id=USEAREA> <head> USEAREA <yes/no> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> If set to no then GoldEd will not recognize <gi/AREA/ kludge. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> USECHARSET <yes/no> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> If set to no then GoldEd will not generate @CHRS and @CHARSET kludges. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> USEFLAGS <yes/no> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> If enabled, <name>GoldED+</name> inserts the FLAGS kludge for certain extended attributes, as defined in FSC-0053 by Joaquim H. Homrighausen, and supported by FrontDoor, D'Bridge, IMail and other modern software. <name>GoldED+</name> uses FLAGS to emulate the Hold and Freq attributes which are not defined in the Hudson message format. </p> </div2> <div2 id=USEFWD> <head> USEFWD <yes/no/ask> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> If enabled, <name>GoldED+</name> inserts the FSC-0092 kludges introduced by the author of FleetStreet, Michael Hohner. These are </p> <p> FWDFROM The original From-Name FWDORIG The original From-Aka FWDTO The original TO-Field FWDDEST The original TO-aka (only in netmails) FWDSUBJ The original subject FWDAREA The original areatag FWDMSGID The original MSGID (useful for reply-linking) </p> <p> When forwarding, <name>GoldED+</name> now adds these kludges, unless the original message already contains them, in which case they are preserved. When doing a normal reply (Alt-Q or Alt-R) to a message with the FWD kludges, <name>GoldED+</name> replies to the forwarder. To reply to the from-name in the forwarded message, use the comment-reply function (Alt-G). If the message contains the FWDAREA kludge, you can reply to the forwarder in the original area (Alt-N) or reply to the from-name in the original area (Alt-B). Note that it is not possible to reply to the to-name of a message with the FWD kludges, and it is also not possible to reply to the to-name of the forwarded message (the FWDTO name). </p> </div2> <div2> <head> USEINTL <type> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> The INTL kludge is normally only inserted in netmail messages, if the origination zone is different from the destination zone (the "Auto" setting), but on systems with many AKA's in the mailer, it might be useful/necessary to add it ALWAYS (the "Yes" setting). The "No" option should never be used. </p> <p> The <type> can be one of the following: </p> <p> Auto Only insert in inter-zone netmail. Yes Always insert. Recommended and default. No Never insert. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> USEMSGID <yes/no> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> If enabled, the MSGID kludge is inserted in netmail and echomail, and the REPLY kludge is inserted when replying to a msg with a MSGID. </p> <p> The MSGID kludge is defined in FidoNet document FTS-9. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> USEPID <yes/no> </head> <p> (no if GoldEd mentioned in tearline, yes otherwise) </p> <p> If disabled then @PID kludge will not be used in your messages regardless of tearline contents. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> USERLIST <file> [zone/addr] </head> <p> In addition to normal nodelist support, <name>GoldED+</name> also supports the "FIDOUSER.LST" style userlist format. The default zone is defined by the first ADDRESS or AKA, but can be overridden by adding the zone number or a full address after the filename. </p> <p> <file> Userlist file in FIDOUSER.LST format. [zone/addr] Default address for the userlist (if no zone info is present). </p> </div2> <div2> <head> USERLISTFILE <file> </head> <p> (GOLDED.LST) </p> <p> <name>GoldED+</name> can generate a list of all users in the current area. This keyword defines the default name of the FIDOUSER.LST style userlist output file generated with the READmakeuserlist command. </p> </div2> <div2 id=USERNAME> <head> USERNAME <name>[[,]< >address] </head> <p> You can define many different names/aliases. When <name>GoldED+</name> finds an un-received message to one of your USERNAME's, it is marked as received. Useful if you use alias names in some conferences. It is possible to change the current name using the READchangeusername popup menu. </p> <p> For msgbase formats with an associated user database, <name>GoldED+</name> uses the *first* defined USERNAME to look in the user database for which lastread record to use. If your name is not found, it is added and a new lastread record created. </p> <p> Example: </p> <p> USERNAME Odinn Sorensen, 2:236/77.999 </p> <p> This keyword can be used globally and in a Random System group. </p> </div2> <div2 id=USETZUTC> <head> USETZUTC <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> Activates usage of TZUTC kludge in your messages. You should properly setup timezone information in your OS. For example, in DOS you should set environment variable TZ to something like this: </p> <p> TZ=MSK-3MSD,M3.5.0/02:00,M10.5.0/03:00 </p> <p> This line valid for Moscow, Russia. </p> <p> This option could be used in random system groups. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> UUDECODEPATH <path> </head> <p> Specifies the path where files are placed when using the uudecode feature. Files are placed in current directory if a path is not specified. </p> <p> The specified path *must* exist ! </p> </div2> <div2 id=VIEWHIDDEN> <head> VIEWHIDDEN <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> Hidden lines are "unknown" kludge lines. If enabled, hidden lines will be displayed (in a different color) when reading msgs. </p> <p> A hidden line is defined as a line which has the FidoNet kludge char (^a, ASCII 1) as the first char and is not on the list of internally or user defined known kludges. </p> <p> This keyword can be used globally and in a Random System group. </p> <p> IMPORTANT NOTE: </p> <p> In some conferences the hidden lines are used to give witty comment "between the lines" in the plain text, but generally it is considered a bad practice and should be avoided because it may cause severe technical problems if a witty comment in a hidden line happens to match a (perhaps experimentally) defined kludge somewhere. It should also be noted that hidden lines are not kept in their original places when used in the JAM msgbase. This is due to the way the JAM specification stores FidoNet kludges. </p> </div2> <div2 id=VIEWKLUDGE> <head> VIEWKLUDGE <yes/no> </head> <p> (no) </p> <p> If enabled, known kludge lines will be displayed (in a different color) when reading msgs. </p> <p> Known kludges are those defined internally in <name>GoldED+</name> plus those defined with the KLUDGE keyword. </p> <p> This keyword can be used globally and in a Random System group. </p> </div2> <div2 id=VIEWQUOTE> <head> VIEWQUOTE <yes/no> </head> <p> (yes) </p> <p> This is an experimental feature. It is similar to the VIEWHIDDEN and VIEWKLUDGE keywords, but for quoted text. I implemented it because I was annoyed with the excessive quoting often seen in Internet newsgroups. When this keyword is set to NO, <name>GoldED+</name> attempts to trim down the quotes so that only the first line of each quote block is shown. It is not always successful, sometimes the result is not so useful. </p> <p> A key command has been added to supplement this feature: READtogglequote. Suggested key assignment: Ctrl-V. Example: </p> <p> ^V READtogglequote </p> <p> Try it out if you are annoyed with excessive quotes. </p> <p> This keyword can be used globally and in a Random System group. </p> </div2> <div2 id=WHOTO> <head> WHOTO <name> </head> <p> This name is inserted in the TO: name field, when entering new messages (not replies) in echomail or local areas. </p> <p> This keyword can be used globally and in a Random System group. </p> </div2> <div2 id=WILDCATUSERNO> <head> WILDCATUSERNO <userno> </head> <p> Defines the lastread set used in the WildCat! 4.x message base. </p> </div2> <div2 id=WRITETEMPLATE> <head> WRITETEMPLATE </head> <p></p> </div2> <div2 id=XLATCHARSET> <head> XLATCHARSET <importid> <exportid> <file> </head> <p> This keyword defines character set translation table files. </p> <p> <importid> Charset import identifier. <exportid> Charset export identifier. <file> Charset translation table file. </p> <p> See the Character Translation chapter for details. </p> </div2> <div2 id=XLATESCSET> <head> XLATESCSET <import> <export> <escfile> </head> <p> This keyword defines escape sequence translation table files. </p> <p> <importid> Escset import identifier. <exportid> Escset export identifier. <file> Escape sequence translation table file. </p> <p> See the Character Translation chapter for details. </p> </div2> <div2 id=XLATEXPORT> <head> XLATEXPORT <charsetid> </head> <p> Defines the export charset for your messages. See the Character Translation chapter for details. </p> <p> This keyword can be used globally and in a Random System group. </p> <p> It can also be used in templates (the @xlatexport token). </p> </div2> <div2 id=XLATIMPORT> <head> XLATIMPORT <charsetid> </head> <p> (IBMPC) </p> <p> Defines the local charset for your machine. See the Character Translation chapter for details. </p> <p> This keyword can be used globally and in a Random System group. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> XLATLOCALSET <charsetid> </head> <p> (IBMPC) </p> <p> Use this keyword to specify the actual physical charset in effect for text screen display. This was previously the hardcoded value IBMPC, corresponding to the IBM codepage 437 (or the nordic edition 865). </p> <p> NOTE: All charset translation files must translate from and to the charset identified with the XLATLOCALSET keyword! </p> </div2> <div2> <head> XLATPATH <path> </head> <p> This is the path where <name>GoldED+</name> tries to find the XLATCHARSET and XLATESCSET files. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> ZONEGATING <yes/no/ask> </head> <p> (ask) </p> <p> When writing a netmail message to a destination in another zone, you can either send the message directly (No) or via the local ZoneGate (Yes). You can also be consulted each time (Ask). <name>GoldED+</name> won't ask if Cra or Hld attribute is set. </p> <p> <!-- page --> <!-- --------------------------------------------------------------------- --> </div2> </div1> <div1> <head> Obsolete Keywords </head> <p> This is a list of keywords which were used in various older versions. These keywords are now obsolete, either because they have been renamed or replaced, or if they no longer have any function. Most of the keywords are still active and remapped to the new names. </p> <p> To check if you have obsolete keywords in your setup, run <name>GoldED+</name> with the -F -D commandline parameters. Then if you get a number of "Unknown keyword" warnings, you should replace the old keywords with the new ones or remove them. </p> <p> Old keyword: New keyword: </p> <p> AREAAUTOFREQ AREAFREQTO AREABADMSGS SOUPBADMSGS AREASORT AREALISTSORT ASSIGNTO MEMBER AUTOATTACH EDITAUTOATTACH BLANKTIME SCREENBLANKER BOARDNOS (removed) CCATTRIB ATTRIBSCC CCLIST CARBONCOPYLIST CFMATTRIB ATTRIBSCFM CHANGEDATE EDITCHANGEDATE CHANGEPROMPT (removed) CHARSET XLATCHARSET CLEARKEYS (removed) COLOUR COLOR COMMENTNOISE BEEPCOMMENT COOKIEFILE (removed) CRLFTERM EDITCRLFTERM DELORIG ASKDELORIG DISPMSGLIST MSGLISTFIRST DISPMSGLISTFAST MSGLISTFAST DISPSTYLECODES STYLECODES DOSSWAP (removed) ECHOATTRIB ATTRIBSECHO ECHOINFO CTRLINFOECHO EDITMARGIN (removed) EDITORVERSION (removed) ELIMSNOW (removed) ESCSET XLATESCSET EXCLAREA AREAEXCL EXPORTCHARSET XLATEXPORT EXTKEYS (removed) FIDOLASTREADNO FIDOUSERNO FIELDCLEAR EDITFIELDCLEAR FILECHECK (removed) FILECHECKALL (removed) FREEAREA (removed) FREETEAR (removed) GOLDEDCFM CONFIRMFILE GOLDEDLOG LOGFILE GOLDEDLST USERLISTFILE GOLDEDMSG EDITORFILE GOLDEDNAM NAMESFILE GOLDEDPRN OUTPUTFILE GOLDHELP (no longer documented) GOLDKEYS (no longer documented) GOLDLANG (no longer documented) GOLDRAND (no longer documented) GOLDXLAT (no longer documented) HARDLINE EDITHARDLINE HARDLINES EDITHARDLINES HWMARKS (removed) INCLAREA AREAINCL INTERNALEDITOR EDITINTERNAL LASTREAD FIDOLASTREAD LASTREADUSER FIDOUSERNO LISTWRAP (removed) LOCALATTRIB ATTRIBSLOCAL LOCALCHARSET XLATIMPORT LOCALHIGHLIGHT (removed) LOCALINFO CTRLINFOLOCAL LOCALNOISE (removed) MAPDRIVE MAPPATH MATCHAKA AKAMATCH MAXCOLS SCREENMAXCOL MAXMSGSIZE (removed) EDITMSGSIZE (removed) MAXROWS SCREENMAXROW MIXCASE EDITMIXCASE MULTIQBBS (removed) NETATTRIB ATTRIBSNET NETINFO CTRLINFONET NETTEAR CTRLINFONET performs similar function NEXTAREA AREANEXT NEXTMSGS (removed) NODELISTPAGEBAR (removed) NOISEFACTOR (removed) OVERLAY (removed) OVERLAYEMS (removed) OVERLAYEXT (removed) PAGEBAR (removed) QBBSINCRESCAN (removed) QBBSPATH HUDSONPATH QBBSREBUILD (removed) QBBSSCAN (removed) QMSGPATH HUDSONPATH REALMSGNO (removed) REBUILD (removed) RENAREA AREARENAME REPLYRE EDITREPLYRE RIGHTMARGIN DISPMARGIN SAVEMENU EDITSAVEMENU SAVETIME EDITAUTOSAVE SAYBIBI (removed) SCANAREA AREASCAN SCREENELIMSNOW (removed) SCREENUSEANSI (removed) SHADOWS (removed) SHARE SHAREMODE SHOWTWITS TWITMODE SIGNALFILE SEMAPHORE SOUNDDEVICE (removed) SPACEQUOTES (removed) SPELLCHECKER EDITSPELLCHECK STACKKEYS KEYBSTACK STARTECHO AREASTART SWAPALL (removed) SYSOP USERNAME TABSIZE DISPTABSIZE TAGLINEFILE (removed) TIMESLICE (removed) TIMEZONEOFFSET USETZUTC performs similar function UNDELETELINES EDITUNDELETE USEBIOS SCREENUSEBIOS XPLIST CROSSPOSTLIST </p> <p> <!-- page --> <!-- --------------------------------------------------------------------- --> </div1> <div1> <head> Location Dependent Configuration Keywords </head> <p> The following configuration keywords are location dependent and should be placed in a particular order in the configuration file(s). Keywords that are *not* listed can be placed anywhere you want. </p> <p> The keywords are listed in groups of those that depend on each other. They are listed in the recommended order within each group. The order between the groups is not important, with one noted exception. </p> <p> Name/Address/Areas: USERNAME ADDRESS AKA ATTRIBSNET Specifies default attributes for AREAFILE etc. ATTRIBSECHO As above. ATTRIBSLOCAL As above. FIDOMSGTYPE PCBOARDPATH Recommended if you use PCBoard. MAPPATH AREARENAME Rename occurs before AREAEXCL/INCL. AREAEXCL AREAINCL AREAISEMAIL AREAISNEWS AREAPATH Default path for the AREAFILE's. AREAFILE RA2USERSBBS Overrides AREAFILE RemoteAccess. AREADESC Add description and more to some AREAFILE's. AREA Overrides areas in AREAFILE's. AREADEF As above. </p> <p> Paths: GOLDPATH TEMPPATH MUST be in GOLDED.CFG. Used only by GoldNODE. </p> <p> Nodelists: MUST be below ADDRESS/AKA and ONLY in GOLDED.CFG! NODEPATH NODELIST USERLIST EXCLUDENODES Remember to replace "ALL" with '*'. INCLUDENODES As above. </p> <p> Colors: INTENSECOLORS Selects a default intense colorset if enabled. COLORSET Selects a default colorset. COLOR </p> <p> External utils: EXTERNOPTIONS EXTERNUTIL </p> <p> Character translation: XLATPATH XLATCHARSET XLATESCSET </p> <p> Random System: GROUP Starts a group. MEMBER Defines areas that are members of the group. <Group Items> See the Random System chapter for a list. ENDGROUP Ends a group. </p> <p> <!-- page --> <!-- --------------------------------------------------------------------- --> </div1> <div1 id=MESSAGEATTRS><head>Message Attributes Reference</head> <p> This is a list and description of all message attributes that are supported by <name>GoldED+</name> in the keywords that accept attribute settings or can be displayed in the header. </p> <p> A/S Archive/sent. ARQ Audit request. ATT File attached. CFM Confirmation receipt requested. COV Fax cover letter. CRA Crash - high priority mail. DEL Deleted. DIR Direct. Don't route this message. FAX Fax image attached. FRQ File request. GRP Group message. HIR Fax hi-resolution image. HLD Hold for pickup. HUB Host- or Hub-route message. IMM Immediate - Send message NOW! K/S Kill/sent. Delete message automatically after it is sent. KFS Kill/file/sent. Delete attached files after they are sent. LET Fax letterhead. LOC Local. Message was written on your system. LOK Lock. Prevents send/delete/purge/editing. ORP Orphan. Could not be sent because destination node is unknown. PKD Packed. Used in area definitions to unpack before using. PRN Msg has been printed. Specific for Squish (bitvalue 00040000h). PVT Private. Message may only be read by the addressee and author. R/O Read only. Used in area definitions to prevent writing. RCV Received. Read by the addressee. RRC Return receipt. RRQ Return receipt requested. RSV FTS-1 reserved (unused) attribute. SIG Fax signature. SNT Sent. Message has been sent or exported from the msgbase. TFS Truncate/file/sent. Truncate files to zero length when sent. TRS Transit. Message passing through, not for you. UNS Unsent message. URQ Update file request. XMA Xmail. Attach does not conform to the ARCmail 0.60 standard. ZON Zonegate. Route through zonegate if possible. </p> <p> <!-- page --> <!-- --------------------------------------------------------------------- --> </div1> <div1 id=AREACONFIGURATION><head>Area Configuration</head> <p> GoldED offers a wide variety of methods for defining message areas. You can define each area manually in the GOLDED.CFG file (or an INCLUDE'ed GOLDAREA.CFG file), or you can tell <name>GoldED+</name> to read the area setup files of many popular BBS/mailer/mail processor packages. </p> <p> For manual definition of areas, use the AREA or AREADEF (recommened) keywords. </p> <p> For external area configuration, the general syntax for the AREAFILE keyword is: </p> <p> AREAFILE <programname> [path or filename(s)] [-options] </p> <p> Available options: </p> <p> -S<sortspec> </p> <p> If you are *not* using the global AREALISTSORT keyword for sorting all the areas, you can sort the areas of each AREAFILE separately. See the AREALISTSORT keyword for the definition of <sortspec>. </p> <p> If no path is specified, the appropriate environment variable or the AREAPATH is used to find the files. </p> <p> The <programname> can be one of the following: </p> <div2> <head> AdeptXBBS </head> <p> Reads the AdeptXBBS configuration files. </p> <p> Looks for the ADEPTXBBS environment variable. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> AreasBBS </head> <p> <name>GoldED+</name> is can handle a wide variety of AREAS.BBS type files. It can read and distinguish between the old CONFMAIL style with paths for *.MSG areas, the Hudson/Goldbase style with board numbers, the Squish style with "$basename" and the JAM style with "!basename". </p> <p> The disadvantage of using an AREAS.BBS is that there are no area descriptions. The echoid is used as description instead. However, <name>GoldED+</name> will use any text behind a semicolon on definition lines as description. This may or may not be compatible with mail processors, so be careful. A better solution may be to use the AREAFILE Echolist to add descriptions from a separate file. </p> <p> One or more AREAS.BBS files may be specified on the same line. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Concord </head> <p> Support is planned but not yet implemented. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Crashmail </head> <p> Reads the CrashMail II configuration file. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> D'Bridge </head> <p> Reads the DBRIDGE.AA1/.AA2 files (for version 1.30) or the DBRIDGE.ADF of the later versions. </p> <p> Looks for the "DBRIDGE" and "DB" environment variables. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Dutchie </head> <p> Reads the DUTCHIE.ARE file. </p> <p> Looks for the "DUTCHIE" environment variable. </p> </div2> <div2 id=ECHOLIST> <head> Echolist </head> <p> Reads a simple ascii-text file containing an echolist in this format: </p> <p> <echoid> <description> </p> <p> or DZ-format (requires -DZ switch): </p> <p> [Status], Tag, Comment, Moderator's Name, Address,[Flags] </p> <p> This feature adds descriptions to already existing areas in <name>GoldED+</name>. Example: </p> <p> AREAFILE AreasBBS AREAS.BBS AREAFILE EchoList ECHOLIST.TXT AREAFILE EchoList echo5020.lst -dz </p> <p> Descriptions for unknown echoids are ignored. Blank lines and lines beginning with characters which are illegal in echoids (such as ';') are also ignored. </p> <p> Additional switch -SqaFix could be used to read echolist and groups from SqaFix configuration file: </p> <p> AREAFILE Squish C:\SQUISH\ AREAFILE EchoList C:\SQUISH\SQAFIX.CFG -SqaFix </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Ezycom </head> <p> Reads CONFIG.EZY and MESSAGES.EZY. Supports Ezycom 1.02 and 1.10g, but not 1.01. </p> <p> Looks for the "EZY" and "TASK" environment variables. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> FastEcho </head> <p> Reads the FASTECHO.CFG file. Supports version 1.10 up to 1.46. </p> <p> Looks for the "FASTECHO" environment variable. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Fidoconfig </head> <p> Reads fidoconfig (used in Husky Project software). Supports version 0.15. Used parser is more powerful than original from fidoconfig, due to it strictly follows specification from proposal and implements all features from there. Additionaly it implements groups not described in proposal but used in in library. </p> <p> Looks for the "FIDOCONFIG" environment variable. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> FidoPCB </head> <p> Reads FIDOPCB.CFG. Supports version 1.x. </p> <p> Looks for the "FIDOPCB" environment variable. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> FMail </head> <p> Reads FMAIL.CFG and FMAIL.AR. Supports versions 0.92, 0.98, 1.0g, and 1.20. </p> <p> Looks for the "FMAIL" environment variable. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> FrontDoor </head> <p> Reads the SETUP.FD/FD.SYS and FOLDER.FD/FOLDER.SYS files. If you want the real echoid's attached to the areas, you will also need to supply the filename of the relevant AREAS.BBS file(s). Supports versions 1.99c and 2.xx. </p> <p> Looks for the "FD" environment variable. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> GEcho </head> <p> Reads SETUP.GE and AREAFILE.GE. Supports versions 1.00, 1.02, 1.10, 1.11 and 1.20. </p> <p> Looks for the "GE" environment variable. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> IMAIL </head> <p> Reads the IMAIL.CF and IMAIL.AR files. Supports version 1.60, 1.7x and 1.8x. </p> <p> Looks for the "IMAIL" environment variable. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> InterMail </head> <p> Reads the FD.SYS/IMSYS.CFG and FOLDER.CFG/IMFOLDER.CFG files. Supports version 2.26 and newer. </p> <p> Looks for the "IM" environment variable. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> LoraBBS </head> <p> Reads the CONFIG.DAT and SYSMSG.DAT files. Supports version 2.33, 2.40 and possibly others. </p> <p> Looks for the "LORA" and "LORABBS" environment variables. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Maximus </head> <p> Reads the MAX.PRM and AREA.DAT or MAREA.DAT files. Compatible (or should be) with both the old (1.xx) and (2.xx) and new (3.xx) formats. If your AREA.DAT is named differently, you must supply the correct filename. </p> <p> Looks for the "MAXIMUS" environment variable. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> ME2 </head> <p> Reads the old ME2 editor AREADESC.ME2 file and AREAS.BBS file(s). You must supply the names of both files. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Opus </head> <p> Reads the Opus 1.1x SYSTEM??.DAT files or the Opus 1.7x SYSMSG.DAT file. </p> <p> Looks for the "OPUS" environment variable. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> ParToss </head> <p> Reads the ParToss configuration file. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> PCBoard </head> <p> Reads the PCBOARD.DAT, CNAMES.@@@ and CNAMES.ADD files. Supports version 14.x and 15.x, up to and including 15.22. Note that, depending on the version, echoid's may not be read from this format. If the echoid is not available, the description is used as echoid, after conversion to uppercase and spaces to underscores. </p> <p> Looks for the "PCBOARD" environment variable. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Portal </head> <p> Reads the PORTAL*.CFG and PORTAL.ARE files. </p> <p> Looks for the "POPCMDLINE" environment variable. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> ProBoard </head> <p> Reads MSGAREAS.PB. Supports version 2.0. </p> <p> Looks for the "PB" environment variable. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> QEcho </head> <p> Reads /etc/qecho/AreaList. Supports version patched by Eugene Sorochinsky for JAM messae base support. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> QFront </head> <p> Reads QORIGIN.DAT and QECHOS.DAT. Supports version 1.13b. </p> <p> Looks for the "QFRONT" environment variable. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> QuickBBS </head> <p> Reads the CONFIG.BBS or QUICKCFG.DAT and MSGCFG.DAT files. To get the real echoid's, you must also supply the filename of the relevant AREAS.BBS. </p> <p> Looks for the "QUICKBBS" and "QBBS" environment variables. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> RaEcho </head> <p> Reads AREAS.RAE. Supports version 1.00 and 1.01. </p> <p> Looks for the "RAECHO" environment variable. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> RemoteAccess </head> <p> Reads the MESSAGES.RA file. To get the real echoid's, you must also supply the filename of the relevant AREAS.BBS. Supports versions 0.xx, 1.xx, 2.0x and 2.5x. </p> <p> Looks for the "RA" environment variable. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Squish </head> <p> Reads SQUISH.CFG and AREAS.BBS (if used). Supports version 1.0x and 1.1x. The "Include <filename>" feature of Squish 1.10 is also supported. </p> <p> The optional /G switch specifies the default group of the imported areas, i.e. /g=G or /g=#103. </p> <p> Looks for the "SQUISH" and "MAXIMUS" environment variables. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> SuperBBS </head> <p> Reads CONFIG.BBS, SCONFIG.BBS and BOARDS.BBS. Supports version 1.16 and 1.17. </p> <p> Looks for the "SUPERBBS" and "SBBS" environment variables. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> timEd </head> <p> Reads TIMED.CFG and any included file. Also reads the configuration from other mail software defined in TIMED.CFG. </p> <p> Looks for the "TIMED" environment variable. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Termail </head> <p> This is for the Terminate Mail system (Termail). <name>GoldED+</name> does currently only support Termail 4.00 und 5.xx style .CFG-files. </p> <p> Reads TM.CFG and any AREAFILE (an AREAS.BBS type file) defined there. </p> <p> NOTE: If you use this, you must start <name>GoldED+</name> in the Termail directory, because the standard TM configuration files use relative paths. </p> <p> Looks for the "TM" environment variable. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> TosScan </head> <p> Reads the FD.SYS/SETUP.FD and AREAFILE.FD files. Supports version 1.00 and FrontDoor 1.99c and 2.xx. </p> <p> Looks for the "FD" environment variable. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> WaterGate </head> <p> Reads the WTRCFG.TDB and AREABASE.TDB files. Supports version 0.93. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> WMail </head> <p> Reads the WMAIL.PRM and AREAS.PRM files. Supports version 2.2. </p> <p> Looks for the "WMAIL" environment variable. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> XMail </head> <p> Reads the AREAS.XM file. Supports version 1.00. </p> <p> Looks for the "XM" environment variable. </p> <!-- page --> <!-- --------------------------------------------------------------------- --> </div2> </div1> <div1 id=RANDOMSYSTEM><head>The Random System</head> <p> With the Random System, you can define area-specific sets of origins, tearlines, templates, usernames and many other items. If more than one item of each type is specified, a random one is picked - a Random System. This is a very useful feature when (for example) participating in conferences with different languages. </p> <p> The Random System is built on the idea of "groups". A group is a collection of "items", belonging to the group. You can assign one or more echomail areas, designated by their echoid's to a group. Groups can also be specified for just a single echo, and DOS/4DOS-style wildcards can be used to simplify the assignment of echoes with common strings in their name, such as *.DK, SIG.* and so on. In this way, you could for example setup one group for all national echoes, another for special local echoes, a third for international echoes etc. </p> <div2> <head> Defining Groups </head> <p> The general syntax of a group definition is: </p> <p> GROUP <id>[:] ; items go here [Member <id list>] ENDGROUP </p> <p> The Group <id> can be one of three things: </p> <p> 1. A group letter or #number, matching the group letters or numbers used in the AREAFILE's of D'Bridge, GEcho, IMAIL, TosScan and many others. To use this feature, you need to enable the AREAFILEGROUPS keyword. </p> <p> 2. An individual echoid or echoid mask (wildcards can be used). The items are then simply defined below the Group line. </p> <p> 3. A group label, terminated by a colon (:). The group items are defined below the Group line. Echoes are assigned to the group by adding one or more Member statements. </p> <p> You can't assign a group to another group. It will not harm, but it also won't work :-) </p> <p> The order of groups is very important. <name>GoldED+</name> scans the groups from the top down. This means that the most general groups must be placed at the bottom and exceptions (individual areas for example) must be placed at the top. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Defining Random Items </head> <p> The random items are defined much like in the main <name>GoldED+</name> configuration file. </p> <p> If more than one of each item is defined within a group, those items will be picked randomly (hence the name "Random System"), while <name>GoldED+</name> collects items when entering an area. </p> <p> Random Item Keywords: <ref target=AKA><kw/AKA/</ref>, <ref target=AKAMATCHING><kw/AKAMATCHING/</ref>, <ref target=AREACOPYADDID><kw/AREACOPYADDID/</ref>, <ref target=AREACOPYDIRECT><kw/AREACOPYDIRECT/</ref>, <ref target=AREACOPYTO><kw/AREACOPYTO/</ref>, <ref target=AREAFORWARDDIRECT><kw/AREAFORWARDDIRECT/</ref>, <ref target=AREAFREQDIRECT><kw/AREAFREQDIRECT/</ref>, <ref target=AREAFREQTO><kw/AREAFREQTO/</ref>, <ref target=AREAREPLYDIRECT><kw/AREAREPLYDIRECT/</ref>, <ref target=AREAREPLYTO><kw/AREAREPLYTO/</ref>, <ref target=AREAYOUWROTETO><kw/AREAYOUWROTETO/</ref>, <ref target=ATTRIBUTES><kw/ATTRIBUTES/</ref>, <ref target=CTRLINFO><kw/CTRLINFO/</ref>, <ref target=EDITHARDTERM><kw/EDITHARDTERM/</ref>, <ref target=EDITMIXCASE><kw/EDITMIXCASE/</ref>, <ref target=EDITREPLYRE><kw/EDITREPLYRE/</ref>, <ref target=FORCETEMPLATE><kw/FORCETEMPLATE/</ref>, <ref target=INPUTFILE><kw/INPUTFILE/</ref>, <ref target=INTERNETADDRESS><kw/INTERNETADDRESS/</ref>, <ref target=INTERNETGATE><kw/INTERNETGATE/</ref>, <ref target=INTERNETMSGID><kw/INTERNETMSGID/</ref>, <ref target=INTERNETRFCBODY><kw/INTERNETRFCBODY/</ref>, <ref target=LOADLANGUAGE><kw/LOADLANGUAGE/</ref>, <ref target=MEMBER><kw/MEMBER/</ref>, <ref target=MSGLISTDATE><kw/MSGLISTDATE/</ref>, <ref target=MSGLISTFAST><kw/MSGLISTFAST/</ref>, <ref target=MSGLISTFIRST><kw/MSGLISTFIRST/</ref>, <ref target=MSGLISTHEADER><kw/MSGLISTHEADER/</ref>, <ref target=MSGLISTWIDESUBJ><kw/MSGLISTWIDESUBJ/</ref>, <ref target=NICKNAME><kw/NICKNAME/</ref>, <ref target=NETNAME><kw/NETNAME/</ref>, <ref target=ORGANIZATION><kw/ORGANIZATION/</ref>, <ref target=ORIGIN><kw/ORIGIN/</ref>, <ref target=OUTPUTFILE><kw/OUTPUTFILE/</ref>, <ref target=PLAY><kw/PLAY/</ref>, <ref target=QUOTEBUFFILE><kw/QUOTEBUFFILE/</ref>, <ref target=QUOTECHARS><kw/QUOTECHARS/</ref>, <ref target=QUOTECTRL><kw/QUOTECTRL/</ref>, <ref target=QUOTESTRING><kw/QUOTESTRING/</ref>, <ref target=QUOTESTOPS><kw/QUOTESTOPS/</ref>, <ref target=QUOTEWRAPHARD><kw/QUOTEWRAPHARD/</ref>, <ref target=SEARCHFOR><kw/SEARCHFOR/</ref>, <ref target=TAGLINE><kw/TAGLINE/</ref>, <ref target=TAGLINECHAR><kw/TAGLINECHAR/</ref>, <ref target=TAGLINESUPPORT><kw/TAGLINESUPPORT/</ref>, <ref target=TEARLINE><kw/TEARLINE/</ref>, <ref target=TEMPLATE><kw/TEMPLATE/</ref>, <ref target=TEMPLATEMATCH><kw/TEMPLATEMATCH/</ref>, <ref target=TWITMODE><kw/TWITMODE/</ref>, <ref target=USEAREA><kw/USEAREA/</ref>, <ref target=USEFWD><kw/USEFWD/</ref>, <ref target=USERNAME><kw/USERNAME/</ref>, <ref target=USETZUTC><kw/USETZUTC/</ref>, <ref target=VIEWHIDDEN><kw/VIEWHIDDEN/</ref>, <ref target=VIEWKLUDGE><kw/VIEWKLUDGE/</ref>, <ref target=VIEWQUOTE><kw/VIEWQUOTE/</ref>, <ref target=WHOTO><kw/WHOTO/</ref>, <ref target=WRITETEMPLATE><kw/WRITETEMPLATE/</ref>, <ref target=XLATEXPORT><kw/XLATEXPORT/</ref>, <ref target=XLATIMPORT><kw/XLATIMPORT/</ref>. </p> <p> See the Configuration Keyword Reference chapter for details about each keyword. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Random System Example </head> <p> Below is an example of how a Random System could be setup. Note how the letter group 'D' goes first, followed by the explicit group definitions for the NERDS and FOO echoes. Then comes the more general groups (those with Label:'s), where the echoes are assigned with one or more Member statements. At last there is the catch-all "Group *", which works as the default group. </p> <p> === Cut, GOLDRAND.CFG === </p> <p> Group NERDS ; For the NERDS echo. Origin "I am a Nerd. Take me to your Loser!" </p> <p> Group FOO ; This group is *only* for the FOO echo. Tearline FooED @rev Origin "Foo-ing my day away" </p> <p> Group FooEchoes: Member *FOO* ; Use wildcards to catch any other foo echo. Tearline FooED @rev Origin "This is a Foo-lish origin" </p> <p> Group FidoNet: Member NET_DEV, WORLDPOL, INTERCOOK Member GREEN.029, C_ECHO, C_PLUSPLUS Origin "Fight-O-Net? Good name..." Template FIDONET.TPL Whoto Everyone </p> <p> Group SigNet: Member SIG.* ; The wildcard is VERY handy here ;-) Origin "To SIG or not to SIG..." Template SIGNET.TPL </p> <p> Group D ; Letter D for Danish echoes. Template DANSK.TPL </p> <p> Group * ; This is default group Origin "Yet another forgotten echo" </p> <p> === Uncut === </p> <p> See the example GOLDRAND.CFG in the ADVANCED archive for a real-life setup similar to the one I use myself. </p> <!-- page --> <!-- --------------------------------------------------------------------- --> </div2> </div1> <div1 id=COLORCONFIG> <head> The Color Configuration </head> <p> Color configuration in <name>GoldED+</name> is a bit complicated, and you probably have to experiment quite a bit, if you want make your own setup. For your convenience, I have added a number of example color setups, provided by some of my many good users. I suggest you try them all and use the one that suits you best, perhaps tuning it a bit to your taste. </p> <p> The COLOR keyword uses the following syntax: </p> <div2> <head> COLOR <window> <part> <colors> </head> <p> <window> AREA, ASK, BACKGROUND, BRAG, HEADER, HELP, INFO, MENU, READER, SHADOW, STATUS. </p> <p> <part> BLOCK, BORDER, BTYPE, EDIT, HIDDEN, HIGHLIGHT, INPUT, KLUDGE, NOSELECT, ORIGIN, QUOTE, SELECTOR, TEARLINE, TITLE, WINDOW. </p> <p> The <colors> are composed of [blinking] <ink> [on <paper>]. </p> <p> <ink> Black, Blue, Green, Cyan, Red, Magenta, Brown, LGrey, DGrey, LBlue, LGreen, LCyan, LRed, LMagenta, Yellow, White. </p> <p> <paper> Black, Blue, Green, Cyan, Red, Magenta, Brown, LGrey. </p> <p> For monochrome setups we instead have: </p> <p> <ink> Normal, Highlight, Reverse, Underline. </p> <p> The SHADOW color does not need a <part>, because it is global. </p> <p> The paper color always defaults to Black if not specified. </p> <p> If <part> is "BTYPE", the <color> is a value in the range 0-3, which defines the type of lines used when drawing menus and windows: </p> <p> BTYPE 0 is single horizontal and single vertical lines. BTYPE 1 is double horizontal and double vertical lines. BTYPE 2 is single horizontal and double vertical lines. BTYPE 3 is double horizontal and single vertical lines. </p> <p> The default border type is always BTYPE 0. </p> <p> The following is a description of the different window parts: </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Various general color items </head> <p> SHADOW Shadow below windows and menus. STATUS WINDOW Status line at the bottom. BACKGROUND WINDOW Background for the startup window. BACKGROUND BORDER Overscan color (currently DOS only). </p> <p> <anything> PAGEBAR Pagebar (scrollbar). </p> <p> The PAGEBAR color specifially sets the color of the pagebars (scrollbars) in <name>GoldED+</name>. A pagebar color can currently be set for AREA, READER and MENU. Note that BORDER will set both the BORDER and PAGEBAR colors, so remember to place the PAGEBAR color below the BORDER color. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Startup screen / logo window </head> <p> BRAG WINDOW The Copyright window. BRAG BORDER Lines around the Copyright window. BRAG TITLE The logo text. BRAG HIGHLIGHT The inner logo lines. BRAG BLOCK The outer logo lines. BRAG BTYPE Copyright window border type. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Area Selection Menu </head> <p> AREA WINDOW Descriptions, the top line (inc. search). AREA BORDER Lines. AREA TITLE Titles on the border. AREA SELECTOR Selection bar. AREA HIGHLIGHT The color for the area marks. AREA BTYPE Window border type. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Message Header </head> <p> HEADER WINDOW Header text. HEADER BORDER Lines. HEADER TITLE Titles on the border. HEADER INPUT Message number input field. HEADER EDIT Header input fields. HEADER HIGHLIGHT Marks. HEADER BTYPE Window border type. HEADER FROM Header From field. HEADER TO Header To field. HEADER SUBJECT Header Subject field. </p> <p> The FROM/TO/SUBJECT colors supplement the HEADER WINDOW color. Note that WINDOW will also set the FROM/TO/SUBJECT colors, so remember to place the new colors below it. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Message Text </head> <p> READER WINDOW Normal message text. READER BORDER The Pagebar. READER QUOTE (Odd) Quoted lines. READER QUOTE2 (Even) Quoted lines. READER CURSOR Character at cursor pos. (int. editor). READER KLUDHIDD Kludges and hidden lines. READER TEARORIG Tearline and Origin. READER BLOCK Block color (internal editor). READER BTYPE Window border type. READER HIGHLIGHT Search highlight in the message text. READER KLUDGE Known kludges. READER HIDDEN Hidden lines. (Unknown kludges). READER SIGNATURE Internet-Style signatures ("-- "). READER TAGLINE Taglines. (Only the one just above tearline). READER TEARLINE Tearline. READER ORIGIN Origin. </p> <p> The KLUDGE/HIDDEN colors replaces the old KLUDHIDD color. Note that KLUDHIDD will set both the KLUDGE and HIDDEN colors, so remember to place the new colors below it if you keep the old definition. </p> <p> The TAGLINE color is the color of taglines. <name>GoldED+</name> detects a tagline if it starts with "..." or "___" and is just above the tearline or origin. </p> <p> The TEARLINE/ORIGIN colors replaces the old TEARORIG color. Note that TEARORIG will set both the TEARLINE and ORIGIN colors, so remember to place the new colors below it if you keep the old definition. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Miscellaneous Smaller Menus </head> <p> ASK WINDOW Menu items. ASK BORDER Lines. ASK TITLE Menu title. ASK SELECTOR Selection bar. ASK NOSELECT Non-selectable menu items. ASK HIGHLIGHT Hotkeys. ASK BTYPE Window border type. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Miscellaneous Larger Menus (Browser Windows) </head> <p> MENU WINDOW Menu items. MENU BORDER Lines. MENU TITLE Menu title. MENU SELECTOR Selection bar. MENU NOSELECT Non-selectable menu items. MENU HIGHLIGHT Hotkeys/marks. MENU UNREAD When a msg is unread. MENU UNREADHIGH Additional highlight of to/from. MENU UNSENT When a msg is unsent. MENU UNSENTHIGH Additional highlight of to/from. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Help Screens </head> <p> HELP WINDOW Help text. HELP BORDER Lines. HELP SELECTOR Current keyword. HELP HIGHLIGHT Other keywords. HELP BTYPE Window border type. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Pop Up Information Windows </head> <p> INFO WINDOW Window text. INFO BORDER Lines. INFO TITLE Info title. INFO BTYPE Window border type. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Stylecodes </head> <p> STYLECODE ALL All stylecodes at once. STYLECODE B *Bold* STYLECODE I /Italic/ STYLECODE BI /*BoldItalic*/ STYLECODE U _Underline_ STYLECODE BU _*BoldUnderline*_ STYLECODE IU /_ItalicUnderline_/ STYLECODE BIU _/*BoldItalicUnderline*/_ STYLECODE R #Reverse# STYLECODE RB *#ReverseBold#* STYLECODE RI /#ReverseItalic#/ STYLECODE RBI /*#ReverseBoldItalic#*/ STYLECODE RU _#ReverseUnderline_# STYLECODE RBU _*#ReverseBoldUnderline#*_ STYLECODE RIU _/#ReverseItalicUnderline#/_ STYLECODE RBIU _/*#ReverseItalicUnderline#*/_ </p> <p> Note that stylecode color definitions must be placed below COLOR READER WINDOW, because it overrides the COLOR STYLECODE definitions. </p> <p> See the GEDCOL*.CFG and GEDMON*.CFG files for examples of color configuration. </p> <!-- page --> <!-- --------------------------------------------------------------------- --> </div2> </div1> <div1 id=MESSAGETEMPLATE> <head> The Message Template </head> <p> The message template gives you a ready-made skeleton for writing your messages in the editor. The template is one of <name>GoldED+</name>'s many strong features. With this, you can eliminate the tedious typing of greetings etc etc. <name>GoldED+</name> also provides a number of replacement strings, "tokens", to dynamically add message specific information to the template. </p> <p> As in the configuration file, a semicolon (;) first on the line makes the line a comment. Any other line is put into the editor file, after token expansion. Tokens are not case sensitive. </p> <p> The following is a list of the tokens available: </p> <div2> <head> Conditional tokens </head> <p> (these are replaced with a null string) </p> <p> @changed Line is only inserted in Changed msgs (from others). @comment Line is only inserted in Reply-Comments. @echo Line is only inserted in Echomail. @forward Line is only inserted in Forwarded messages. @local Line is only inserted in Local messages. @moderator Line is only inserted if substring "moderator" appeared in from line. @moved Line is only inserted in Reply-Moved messages. @net Line is only inserted in Netmail. @new Line is only inserted in New messages (not replies). @position Specifies the starting line for the editor cursor. @quotebuf Line is only inserted in Quotebuffered msgs. @quoted Line is only inserted in Quoted replies. @reply Line is only inserted in Non-Quoted Replies. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Insert tokens </head> <p> (anything else on the line is ignored) </p> <p> @attrib <attributes> - Adds specific message attributes. @include <filename> - Inserts the file. @forcefrom <"from"> - sets message FROM: field, even if non-empty (see @setfrom) @forcesubj <"subject"> - sets message SUBJ: field, even if non-empty (see @setsubj) @forceto <"to"> - sets message TO: field, even if non-empty (see @setto) @loadlanguage Loads a partial language config file. @message Inserts the original message (in Forward & Change). @quote Inserts a quote of the original message. @random [random.txt] - Inserts random text. @setfrom <"from"> - Sets the message FROM: field. @setsubj <"subject"> - Sets the message SUBJ: field. @setto <"to"> - Sets the message TO: field. @xlatexport <charset> - Sets the export charset. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Replacement tokens </head> <p> (replaced with message specific data): </p> <p> @c3daddr Current user 3D (boss) address. @caddr Current user address. @cdate Current date. @cdesc Current area description. @cecho Current echoid. @cfname Current user first name. @clname Current user last name. @cname Current user name. @cpseudo Current pseudonym given by NICKNAME keyword, or @cfname. @ctime Current time. @ctzoffset Current timezone offset (if available and enabled). @d3daddr Destination 3D (boss) address. @daddr Destination address. @dfname Destination first name. @dlname Destination last name. @dname Destination name. @dpseudo Destination pseudonym (see addressbook), or @dfname. @f3daddr Current from 3D (boss) address. @faddr Current from address. @ffname Current from first name. @flname Current from last name. @fname Current from name. @fpseudo Current from pseudonym (see addressbook), or @ffname. @longpid Long program id. "GoldED", "GoldED/2" or "GoldED/386". @o3daddr Original 3D (boss) address. @oaddr Original address. @odate Original date. @odesc Original area description if moved, else current. @oecho Original echoid if moved, otherwise current. @ofname Original first name. @ofrom Original RFC "From" headerline. @olname Original last name. @omessageid Original RFC "Message-ID" headerline. @omsgid Original MSGID kludge content. @oname Original name. @opseudo Original pseudonym (see addressbook), or @ofname. @origin The current global or Random System origin. @os2slash "/2" if running <name>GoldED+</name>/2. Empty otherwise. @osslash same as above. @otime Original time. @otzoffset Original timezone offset (if available and enabled). @oto Original RFC "To" headerline. @pid Short program id. "GED", "GED/2" or "GED386". @pseudo pseudonym (see addressbook), or @tfname. @rev The revision number (in the form mmdd). @serialno Emptiness. @subject The message subject line. @t3daddr Destination to 3D (boss) address. @taddr Destination to address. @tagline The current global or Random System tagline. @tearline The current global or Random System tearline. @tfname Destination to first name. @tlname Destination to last name. @tname Destination to name. @tpseudo Destination to pseudonym (see addressbook), or @tfname. @ver The simple version number (in the form x.yy) @version The complete release version number of <name>GoldED+</name>. @_caddr Current user address (fixed width: 19 chars). @_cname Current user name (fixed width: 34 chars). @_daddr Destination address (fixed width: 19 chars). @_dname Destination name (fixed width: 34 chars). @_oaddr Original address (fixed width: 19 chars). @_oname Original name (fixed width: 34 chars). @_taddr Destination to address (fixed width: 19 chars). @_tname Destination to name (fixed width: 34 chars). </p> <p> Tokens dealing with names may optionally have two parameters (each parameter enclosed in curve brackets): your name and opponent name, destination name additionally accepts third parameter - WhoTo name. Here is example on how this feature could be used: </p> <p> @oname{I}{You} wrote to @dname{me}{you}{everyone}: </p> <p> The template text begins at the first non-comment line. </p> <p> See the included GOLDED.TPL for example usage. </p> <p> If you need to put some text which contains one of these tokens into a template file, use an extra '@' in front of the token. </p> <p> Example: </p> <p> Internet: somebody@veryhot.com </p> <p> would produce </p> <p> Internet: somebody2.51yhot.com (because @ver is a token) </p> <p> so write it like this instead: </p> <p> Internet: somebody@@veryhot.com </p> <p> The double '@' will then be translated to a single, and token translation skips past the @token. </p> <!-- page --> <!-- --------------------------------------------------------------------- --> </div2> </div1> <div1> <head> The Online Help System </head> <p> GoldED has a built-in context sensitive help system, tied to the <F1> key (one of the very few keys that cannot be reconfigured). It contains a complete keyboard reference and help for most situations. It is current not as complete or sophisticated as I'd like it myself, but this may be improved in future versions. </p> <p> You can completely redefine the help screens if you wish - the GOLDHELP.CFG file is a plain ASCII text file which contains all help definitions. The help file is split into several help categories. Here is an example of a couple of defined help categories: </p> <p> *B 1,Help Category 1 help text help text help text help text help text help text *P help text help text help text help text help text help text *E </p> <p> *B 2,Help Category 2 help text help text help text help text help text help text *P help text help text help text help text help text help text See also: ^Help Category 1^ *E </p> <p> The "*B" indicator specifies the beginning of a help category. The format is "*B helpcatnumber[,helpcatname]". In <name>GoldED+</name> the help categories are numbered 1000-9999, split into more or less logical groups. See the help file for assignments. There should be only one space between the "*B" and the help category number. The help category name is only required for cross-references. If there are no cross-references to that help category, then you can leave the helpcatname parameter out. </p> <p> The "*P" indicator specifies a page break and is optional. You may have as many page breaks as you'd like. The "*E" indicator specifies the end of the help category. The "*B", "*P", and "*E" indicators must all begin in the first column. These indicators and the help category name are case insensitive (can be in lowercase, uppercase, or mixed). </p> <p> In the definition of Help Category 2, you will notice the crossreference to Help Category 1. All cross-referencing is done by embedding the cross- reference category name (not number) inside carats (^). If you need to display a carat inside the help file, use a double carat (^^). </p> <p> Any text contained outside of the "*B" and "*E" is treated as comments. If an "*E" is not found, then the end-of-file will be treated as an "*E". </p> <p> Not all of the help categories in this help file are actually used in the current version of <name>GoldED+</name>. The ones not used are empty, except for a two-line "header". </p> <p> The usable dimensions of the help window are 60 columns by 16 lines. In the help file there is a model of the actual window. </p> <!-- page --> <!-- --------------------------------------------------------------------- --> </div1> <div1> <head> Character Translation </head> <p> GoldED implements several different proposals for character translation in imported and exported messages: </p> <div2> <head> FSC-0050 "Charset Identifier" </head> <p> by Thomas Sundblom. </div2> <div2> <head> FSC-0051 "I51" </head> <p> by Thomas Gradin. </div2> <div2> <head> FSC-0054 "CHARSET proposal" </head> <p> by Duncan McNutt. </div2> <div2> <head> No FSC "Composed Characters" </head> <p> by Andre van de Wijdeven. </p> <p> FSC-0050 is currently known to be implemented in the OPMED 3.xx message editor, and in Opus 1.7x. It uses the same identifier as FSC-0054 (a ^aCHARSET kludge), but is a lot simpler (but not necessarily better). </p> <p> The "I51" and "CHARSET" proposals are in the process of being merged to one proposal, which should combine the advantages of both. They are both based on using the LATIN-1 (also known as ISO 8859-1) character set for extended ASCII. The LATIN-1 set is the same set used by Windows 3.xx, Amiga and many other non-PC computers. In addition to LATIN-1, I51 defines a set of so-called escape sequences for characters not found in the LATIN-1 set. </p> <p> "Composed Characters" became quite popular in Holland, but the author decided to drop his proposal because it relied on escape sequences using the so called "soft-cr" (141d, 8Dh) character. <name>GoldED+</name> will continue to support Composed as long as it seems necessary. </p> <p> If you want to know more about the details, I suggest you read the proposals or contact the authors. </p> <p> GoldED currently supports two types of translation tables, the *.ESC files and the *.CHS files. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> The ESC translation tables </head> <p> The *.ESC files are used for import translation of the escape sequences defined in I51 and Composed Characters. </p> <p> In the ESC files, the semicolon is used for comments. The *first* non-comment line defines the charset the escape code are mapped TO. This is normally IBMPC, and should not be changed. Any other non-comment line is treated as an escape sequence definition with this syntax: </p> <p> <esc1><esc2><space><map chars>[; comment/description] </p> <p> Leading spaces are *not* allowed in ESC files. <esc1> and <esc2> are the two characters that define the escape sequence. <space> is ignored and can be used to make the table look better. <map chars> defines the local representation of the escape sequence, up to three characters. Normally you would only map to one extended ascii character. The map chars can be either the characters themselves, or decimal or hexadecimal numbers of the form "\d<dec>" or "\x<hex>" (like in the C programming language). </p> </div2> <div2> <head> The CHS translation tables </head> <p> The *.CHS files are used for import and export translation of the CHARSET type character sets, and export of I51 and Composed escape sequences. </p> <p> The CHS files uses the format of the raw text files provided in the CHARSET3.ZIP example implementation of FSC-0054. Study some of the files provided if you want to know how to define them. </p> <p> The two keywords XLATESCSET and XLATCHARSET are used to define which files belong to what import and export set. You can define more than one import and export set for each file. </p> <p> The keyword XLATIMPORT defines which charset you have on your own machine - this would normally be "IBMPC". It can be useful to change this (using the Random System) in areas where another character set than IBMPC is the dominant (like Amiga or MacIntosh, whatever). </p> <p> The keyword XLATEXPORT defines the charset your messages should be exported to, if any. </p> <p> Confused? Yeah, I know - this is a confusing subject, and my implementation and documentation is not perfect. Normally you will not have to worry about it. Turn it off completely if you don't understand it. </p> <!-- page --> <!-- --------------------------------------------------------------------- --> </div2> </div1> <div1> <head> Keyboard Command Reference </head> <p> Most of the <name>GoldED+</name> keyboard commands can be reached with just one keystroke. To ease operation for experienced users of other message editors, <name>GoldED+</name> comes with several sets of keys for each of the keyboard commands - direct non-shifted keys, Alt/Ctrl-keys and function keys. Many of these key assignments will be familiar for users of Msged, Msged/Q, ME2 and FM. </p> <p> The following is a list of all keyboard commands, sorted by type and alphabetically, using the format </p> <p> <command> <short description> </p> <p> This list is also available in the context-sensitive help system on the <F1> key. </p> <p> It is possible to almost completely redefine the keyboard - this in done in the GOLDKEYS.CFG file, which also handles macro definition (see later). </p> <div2> <head> Arealist Commands </head> <p> AREAabort Abort the arealist. AREAaskexit Exit <name>GoldED+</name>, prompt for final decision. AREAboardnos Toggle sequential areas vs. board numbers. AREAcatchup Point the lastread pointer to the last message in the current area. AREAdosshell Shell to DOS. AREAdropmsgmarks Unmark all msgs in selected areas. AREAgotofirst Move selection bar to first area. AREAgotolast Move selection bar to last area. AREAgotonext Move selection bar to next area. AREAgotoprev Move selection bar to previous area. AREAheat Heat highwatermarks. AREAjump Move selection bar to next marked area. AREAjumpnextmatch Move selection bar to next matching area. AREAquitnow Exit immediately, no questions asked. AREAscan Scan areas. AREAscanpm Scan areas for personal mail. AREAselect Enter the reader for the selected area. AREAselectmarks Select which set of area marks should be used. AREAsoundkill Stops currently played sound file. AREAtoggle Toggle mark on the selected area. AREAtouchnetscan Touches the SEMAPHORE NETSCAN file. AREAwritegoldlast Write a fresh copy of GOLDLAST.LST AREAzap Zap highwatermarks. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Internal Editor Commands </head> <p> EDITabort Abort editing this message - ask first. EDITanchor Set a block "anchor" on the current line. EDITaskexit Exit from <name>GoldED+</name> - ask first. EDITblockdown Extend block area one line down. EDITblockend Extend block area to the end of line. EDITblockhome Extend block area to the beginning of line. EDITblockleft Extend block area one character left. EDITblockpgup Extend block area one screen up. EDITblockpgdn Extend block area one screen down. EDITblockright Extend block area one character right. EDITblockup Extend block area one line up. EDITcleardeletebuf Clears the undelete buffer. EDITclearpastebuf Clears the cut'n'paste buffer. EDITcopy Copies the block to the cut'n'paste buffer. EDITcopyabovechar Inserts character same as in the same position in previous line. EDITcut Cut the block to the cut'n'paste buffer. EDITdelchar Delete the char at the cursor position. EDITdelete Delete the block. EDITdeleteeol Delete from cursor position to end of line. EDITdelleft Delete the char to the left of the cursor. EDITdelline Delete the current line. (Copied to the EDITdelltword Delete the word to the left of the cursor. EDITdelrtword Delete the word to the right of the cursor. EDITdosshell Shell to DOS. EDITdupline Duplicates the current line. EDITexitmsg Drop this message - NO ASKING! DANGEROUS! EDITexporttext Exports the current block to a file. EDITgobegline Move cursor to beginning of line. EDITgobotline Move cursor to the bottom line in the display. EDITgobotmsg Move cursor to the last line in the message. EDITgodown Move cursor down to next line. EDITgoeol Move cursor to the end of the line. EDITgoleft Move cursor one position left. EDITgopgdn Move cursor one page of lines down. EDITgopgup Move cursor one page of lines up. EDITgoright Move cursor one position right. EDITgotopline Move cursor to the top line in the display. EDITgotopmsg Move cursor to the first line in the message. EDITgoup Move cursor up to the previous line. EDITgowordleft Move cursor to the previous word. EDITgowordright Move cursor to the next word. EDITheader Edit the message header, attributes etc. EDITimportquotebuf Imports the current quote buffer. EDITimporttext Import text file into this message. EDITkillquotes (ignored) EDITloadfile Load the message file saved with EDITsavefile. EDITlookupcursor Lookup name/node at cursor position. EDITlookupdest Lookup TO: node. EDITlookuporig Lookup FROM: node. EDITnewline Terminate paragraph and/or add a new line. EDITpaste Paste a previously cut block at the cursor. EDITquitnow Quit <name>GoldED+</name> immediately - no asking. EDITreflow Reflows the current text or quote paragraph. EDITsavefile Saves the current message as a file. EDITsavemsg Save this message. EDITsoundkill Stops currently played sound flie. EDITspellcheck Calls an external spell checker for the msg. EDITtab Add spaces to the next tab-stop. EDITtabreverse Remove spaces to the prev tab-stop. EDITtogglecase Toggle the case of the cursor character. EDITtoggleinsert Toggle insert mode. EDITtolower Change the cursor character to lowercase. EDITtoupper Change the cursor character to uppercase. EDITundelete Undelete previously deleted lines. EDITzapquotebelow Deletes quotes below. </p> </div2> <div2 id=FILESELECTION> <head> File Selection Commands </head> <p> FILEabort Abort file selection. FILEaskexit Exit <name>GoldED+</name> - ask first. FILEdosshell Shell to DOS. FILEgotofirst Go to first file. FILEgotolast Go to last file. FILEgotonext Go to next file. FILEgotoprev Go to previous file. FILEmark Mark file. FILEmarkall Mark all files. FILEquitnow Quit <name>GoldED+</name> immediately. FILEselect Select the marked file(s). FILEtogglemark Toggle file mark. FILEunmark Unmark file. FILEunmarkall Unmark all files. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Message Lister Commands </head> <p> LISTabort Abort message lister. LISTaskexit Exit <name>GoldED+</name> - ask first. LISTdosshell Shell to DOS. LISTgotobookmark Go to BookMark message. LISTgotofirst Go to first message. LISTgotolast Go to last message. LISTgotonext Go to next message. LISTgotoprev Go to previous message. LISTmarkingoptions Marking menu. LISTquitnow Quit <name>GoldED+</name> immediately. LISTselect Go to reader at the selected message. LISTtogglebookmark Toggle BookMark on the selected message. LISTtoggledate Toggle date column content. LISTtogglemark Toggle Mark on the selected message. LISTtogglewidesubj Toggle between wide and short subject. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Nodelist Browser Commands </head> <p> NODEabort Abort nodelist browsing. NODEaskexit Exit <name>GoldED+</name> - ask first. NODEdosshell Shell to DOS. NODEgotofirst Go to first node. NODEgotolast Go to last node. NODEgotonext Go to next node. NODEgotoprev Go to previous node. NODEquitnow Quit <name>GoldED+</name> immediately. NODEselect Select node. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Message Reader Commands </head> <p> READaddressbookadd Add current/marked mail writer(s) to addressbook. Ask first. READaskexit Exit <name>GoldED+</name>, prompt for final decision. READchangeaka Change default AKA address for current area. READchangeattrs Change the attributes of the current message. READchangemsg Change current message. READchangeorigin Change default origin for the current area. READchangetagline Change default tagline. READchangetemplate Change default template. READchangeusername Change default username. READchangexlatimport Change default import charset. READcommentmsg Comment-Reply to message. (Reply to TO name). READcopymoveforward Enter the Copy/Move/Forward function menu. READdecreasemargin Decrease message margin. For test purposes. READdeletemsg Delete current/marked message(s). Ask first. READdosshell Shell to DOS. READfidorenumber Renumber Fido/Opus *.MSG files. READfilerequest Generate a filerequest from the current msg. READfindall Find string(s) in message header and text. READfindheader Find string(s) in message header. READgotobookmark Go to the "BookMark" message. READgotofirstmsg Go to the first message in the area. READgotolastmsg Go to the last message in the area. READgotomsgno Go to a specific message number. READgotonextarea Go directly to the next area. READgotonextmsg Go to the next message. READgotonextunread Go to the next unread message. READgotoprevarea Go directly to the previous area. READgotoprevmsg Go to the previous message. READgotoprevunread Go to the previous unread message. READgotoreplies Choose from the next messages in the replylink. READgotoreply1st Go to the first reply to this message. READgotoreplynext Go to the next reply to this message. READgotoreplyprev Go to the parent message in the replylink. READincreasemargin Increase message margin. For test purposes. READlookupdest Lookup TO: node. READlookuporig Lookup FROM: node. READmakeuserlist Generate FIDOUSER.LST of users in the area. READmakepathreport Added "path report" feature. The output file can be processed by a RDDT (Route Diagram Drawing Tool) utility. READmarkingoptions Enter the marking menu. READmessagelist Enter the message lister. READmovecommentmsg Comment-Reply in another area. READmovequotemsg Quote-Reply in another area. READmsgcontinue Page down or go to next message. READmsgend Display last part of current message. READmsghome Display first part of current message. READmsglinedown Scroll message display. READmsglineup Scroll message display. READmsgpgdn Page message display. READmsgpgup Page message display. READnewarea Enter the area selection screen. READnewmsg Start a new message. READquitnow Exit <name>GoldED+</name> immediately, no questions asked. READquotebuf Append quote of the msg to the quotebuffer. READquotemsg Quote-Reply to message. (Reply to FROM name). READreplymsg Reply to the current message, without quoting. READsearch Launches the search engine. READsoundkill Stops currently played sound file. READthreadtree Enter the Message Threading lister. READtogglebookmark Toggle a "BookMark" on the current message. READtogglehexdump Toggle hexdump mode. For debugging purposes. READtogglehiddklud Toggle display of Hidden and Kludge lines. READtogglehidden Toggle display of Hidden lines. READtogglekludge Toggle display of Kludge lines. READtogglemark Toggle a message mark on the current message. READtogglemarkread Toggle "Read Marked" mode. READtogglepagebar Toggle the "PageBar" feature. READtogglequote Toggle display of quoted lines. Experimental. READtogglerot13 Toggle ROT13 encryption for the current msg. READtogglerealmsgno Toggle between seq. or real message numbers. READtogglestyles Toggle Disable/Show/Show+Strip of STYLECODES. READtoggletwits Toggle Twit display - Show/Blank/Skip/Ignore. READtouchnetscan Touches the SEMAPHORE NETSCAN file. READtouchsemaphore Popup touch a manually entered semaphore file. READuserbase Launches the addressbook. READuudecode UUdecodes the current message. READwritemsg Write message(s) to file or printer. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Key Undefine Commands </head> <p> AREAundefine EDITundefine FILEundefine LISTundefine NODEundefine READundefine </p> <p> The undefine commands can used to undefine any of the built-in default keyboard definitions. </p> <p> See the Key Reference below for a list of the key symbols you can use in keyboard redefinition. </p> <!-- page --> <!-- --------------------------------------------------------------------- --> </div2> </div1> <div1 id=MACROSANDKEYSTACKING><head>Macros and Keystacking</head> <p> GoldED has a simple keyboard macro facility, which you can use to automate certain common operations. In addition, a "keystacking" facility allows you to create simple automatic macros on the fly. </p> <p> The macro definition syntax is modelled after the syntax used in the QEdit text editor: </p> <p> <assignment-key> Macro <commands or keys> <assignment-key> AreaMacro <commands or keys> <assignment-key> EditMacro <commands or keys> <assignment-key> FileMacro <commands or keys> <assignment-key> ListMacro <commands or keys> <assignment-key> NodeMacro <commands or keys> <assignment-key> ReadMacro <commands or keys> </p> <p> Macros are defined in the GOLDKEYS.CFG file, where you can also find several examples. </p> <p> By using the word "Auto" as <assignment-key>, you can even define a special macro which will be automatically executed when you start GoldED. </p> <p> Keystacking is a special form of auto-macros. You simply specify a bunch of keys to be "stacked" in the (special internal) keyboard buffer for sequential execution. </p> <p> You can either specify a default set of keystacking in the .CFG configuration file, or override any default keystacking by typing the keystack definitions at the <name>GoldED+</name> commandline or the GEDCMD environment variable. </p> <p> See the Key Reference chapter for a list of the key symbols you can use in macros and keystacking. </p> <p> <!-- page --> <!-- --------------------------------------------------------------------- --> </div1> <div1> <head> Key Reference </head> <p> Below is the list of key symbols recognized by <name>GoldED+</name> for keyboard/macro definition and keystacking. </p> <p> Unshifted function keys </p> <p> F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 </p> <p> Shift-function keys </p> <p> #F1 #F2 #F3 #F4 #F5 #F6 #F7 #F8 #F9 #F10 #F11 #F12 </p> <p> Alt-function keys </p> <p> @F1 @F2 @F3 @F4 @F5 @F6 @F7 @F8 @F9 @F10 @F11 @F12 </p> <p> Ctrl-function keys </p> <p> ^F1 ^F2 ^F3 ^F4 ^F5 ^F6 ^F7 ^F8 ^F9 ^F10 ^F11 ^F12 </p> <p> Alt-Numbers </p> <p> @0 @1 @2 @3 @4 @5 @6 @7 @8 @9 </p> <p> Alt-Letters </p> <p> @A @B @C @D @E @F @G @H @I @J @K @L @M @N @O @P @Q @R @S @T @U @V @W @X @Y @Z </p> <p> Ctrl-Letters </p> <p> ^A ^B ^C ^D ^E ^F ^G ^H ^I ^J ^K ^L ^M ^N ^O ^P ^Q ^R ^S ^T ^U ^V ^W ^X ^Y ^Z </p> <p> Insert/Delete </p> <p> Ins ^Ins @Ins Del ^Del @Del </p> <p> Home/End </p> <p> Home ^Home @Home End ^End @End </p> <p> Page up/down </p> <p> PgUp ^PgUp @PgUp PgDn ^PgDn @PgDn </p> <p> Cursor left/right </p> <p> Left ^Left @Left Right ^Right @Right </p> <p> Cursor up/down </p> <p> Up ^Up @Up Down ^Down @Down </p> <p> Misc other keys </p> <p> Esc ^Grey* Key5 Space Tab #Tab @Tab BackSpace ^BackSpace @BackSpace Enter ^Enter @Enter </p> <p> Note that some of the Alt-keys, especially the cursor-related keys and the F11/F12 keys, are "extended" keys normally only available on systems with an extended keyboard bios. However, <name>GoldED+</name> uses a few tricks to make some the extended keys available on non-extended systems. </p> <!-- page --> <!-- --------------------------------------------------------------------- --> </div1> <div1> <head> Language Definition </head> <p> GoldED allows you to almost completely redefine the language dependent text in the program. </p> <p> The language dependent text in <name>GoldED+</name> is defined in the plain ASCII text GOLDLANG.CFG file. </p> <p> See the example language file for the actual method and format of language redefinition. </p> <p> If you are planning to translate the text in <name>GoldED+</name>, you should also look into the definition of the help screens. </p> <p> You do not need permission from the author before announcing or distributing your own modified language files. </p> <div2> <head> Date/Time Substitution Codes </head> <p> A few of the language texts can contain special date/time substitution codes. The keywords for those are: MS_DateTimeFmt, MS_DateFmt, MS_TimeFmt and ST_StatuslineTimeFmt. </p> <p> Here are the valid substitution codes: </p> <p> %a Abbreviated weekday name (Mon, Tue, Wed, ...). %A Full weekday name (Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, ...). %b Abbreviated month name (Jan, Feb, Mar, ...). %B Full month name (January, February, March, ...). %d Day of month (01-31). %e Day of month, with leading space for single digits (1-31). %E Day of month (1-31). %H Hour (00-23) (24-hour clock). %I Hour (01-12) (12-hour clock). %j Day of the year (001-366). %m Month (01-12). %M Minute (00-59). %p AM or PM according to 12-hour clock. %S Second (00-59). %U Week number (00-52) where sunday is first day of the week. %w Weekday (0-6) where 0 is sunday. %W Week number (01-53) where monday is first day of the week. %y Year without century (00-99). %Y Year with century. %% Character '%'. </p> <p> The %a, %A, %b and %B codes substitute to the current language setup loaded using the LOADLANGUAGE keyword. </p> <p> *** NOTE *** </p> <p> In the continuing development of <name>GoldED+</name>, it is impossible to completely maintain backward compatibility of the language format or the text defined there. New features may add and/or obsolete some definitions, or may change the format of others. </p> <p> The existing language file may contain definitions which are already obsolete, but which I haven't had time to search for and remove, as well as there may be some texts in <name>GoldED+</name> which are not yet definable. All this will of course be corrected in future versions. If you find inconsistencies, please report them, because I may have overlooked them. </p> <!-- page --> <!-- --------------------------------------------------------------------- --> </div2> </div1> <div1> <head> Message Kludge Lines </head> <p> Kludge lines are special control lines, that begin with a ^a (ASCII 1) as the first character of the line, followed by a unique identifying name and the relevant control information. </p> <p> GoldED is aware of a lot of these kludges, and supports a number of them, if you want to have them inserted in your messages. </p> <p> Some kludges are useless junk and more or less commercials for this and that software, but a few are useful for miscellaneous purposes. In the following, I will list (some of) the known and supported kludges, and a short description of what they are used for. </p> <div2> <head> ACUPDATE: </head> <p> This kludge is a feature of Squish 1.10: Message Broadcast Modify/Delete. Read the docs for Squish 1.10 for details. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> AREA:<echoname> </head> <p> This is not really a kludge, and it doesn't begin with a ^a, but I included it on the kludge list because it sometimes turned up in echomail areas where it should have been stripped off by the mail tosser. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> CC: <name> <address> </head> <p> When <name>GoldED+</name> produces carbon copies, it adds to each message a full list of the persons who get a copy. One version of this list is hidden behind the CC: kludge. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> CHARSET:<charset identifier> </head> <p> Proposed in FSC-0050 and FSC-0054, this kludge is an attempt to find a solution to the problem of the high-bit characters (like the IBM PC vs Amiga vs Mac etc. national chars) in messages. <name>GoldED+</name> can recognize, use and generate this kludge. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> CHRC:<font change id> </head> <p> Proposed in FSC-0054, this is a kludge for changing fonts, underlining and other stuff. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> CHRS:<charset identifier> </head> <p> Alternative FSC-0054 version of the CHARSET kludge. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> DESTADDR:<destaddress> </head> <p> This one is not proposed anywhere, but it looks like it gives the address of the intended recipient. <name>GoldED+</name> takes the address for the dest field. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> DOMAIN <destdomain> <destaddress> <origdomain> <origaddress> </head> <p> Proposed in FSC-0038, this tries to solve the problem of mail crossing domain boundaries. <name>GoldED+</name> takes both addresses. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> EID:<crc16> <stamp> [replycrc16] <replystamp> </head> <p> Proposed in FSC-0031, this is used for dupe checking and reply linking. The EID is today generally considered as garbage, but a lot of older mail processors such as QMail still generate it. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> ENC: </head> <p> Signifies that the message contains encrypted data. <name>GoldED+</name> will add this kludge if it detects that the message has been encrypted with PGP. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> EOT: </head> <p> End Of Text. See SOT. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> FLAGS <special attributes> </head> <p> Proposed in FSC-0053, this is a special netmail kludge used by the FrontDoor and D'Bridge mailers and the IMail mail processor. It provides extra attributes not found among the standard attributes in the normal message/packet headers. <name>GoldED+</name> uses and generates this kludge, if you set the attributes. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> FMPT <from point> </head> <p> Defined in <name>FTS-0001</name>, this tells the point number of the originator. Netmail only. <name>GoldED+</name> can generate this line. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> FWDAREA <original area> </head> <p> <name>FSC-0092</name>: The original area in forwards. See <kw>USEFWD</kw> and <name>FSC-0092</name> for a more detailed description. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> FWDDEST <aka> </head> <p> <name>FSC-0092</name>: The original <gi>To:</gi> address in forwards. See <kw>USEFWD</kw> and <name>FSC-0092</name> for a more detailed description. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> FWDFROM <name> </head> <p> <name>FSC-0092</name>: The original <gi>From:</gi> name in forwards. See <kw>USEFWD</kw> and <name>FSC-0092</name> for a more detailed description. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> FWDMSGID <aka serial#> </head> <p> <name>FSC-0092</name>: The original <gi>MSGID</gi> in forwards. See <kw>USEFWD</kw> and <name>FSC-0092</name> for a more detailed description. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> FWDORIG <aka> </head> <p> <name>FSC-0092</name>: The original from-aka in forwards. See <kw>USEFWD</kw> and <name>FSC-0092</name> for a more detailed description. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> FWDSUBJ <original subject> </head> <p> <name>FSC-0092</name>: The original subject in forwards. See <kw>USEFWD</kw> and <name>FSC-0092</name> for a more detailed description. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> FWDTO <name> </head> <p> <name>FSC-0092</name>: The original <q>To:</q> field in forwards. See <kw>USEFWD</kw> and <name>FSC-0092</name> for a more detailed description. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> GATECHK:<???> </head> <p> Some sort of gating kludge? Don't know what it's for. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> GIF:<filename> </head> <p> Invented by <name>Henk Wever</name> and used in his <name>Dutchie</name> software. The filename (which does not have an extension) indicates a <abbr>GIF</abbr> picture of the author of the message. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> GROUP:<echoname> </head> <p> I think this one comes from stray Groupmail messages. Similar to the <gi>AREA</gi> kludge. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> I51 (no parameters) </head> <p> Proposed in <name>FSC-0051</name>, this indicates that the message text conforms to the <name>ISO-8859-1</name> (<name>LATIN-1</name>) character set, and may contain certain escape codes. The <name>ISO-8859-1</name> set is used in <name>Amiga</name> and <name>Windows</name> 3.xx. <name>GoldED+</name> can recognize, use and generate this kludge. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> INTL <destaddress> <origaddress> </head> <p> Defined in <name>FTS-0001</name>, this one solves the problem of crossing zone boundaries. Netmail only. <name>GoldED+</name> can generate this line. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> MSGID: <origaddress> <serialno> </head> <p> Defined in <name>FTS-0009</name>, this is a method for unique identification of a message. It can be used for dupe checking and replylinking. <name>GoldED+</name> can generate this line. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> MSGTO: <destaddress> </head> <p> This one is not proposed anywhere, but it looks like it gives the address of the intended recipient. <name>GoldED+</name> takes the address for the dest field. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Original: <Carbon copy, original name> </head> <p> Generated by the <name>FrontDoor</name> <name>FM</name> editor when it produces carbon copies. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> PATH: <list of nodes> </head> <p> Defined in <name>FTS-0004</name>, this is a valuable tool for finding dupe links and other structural faults in the net structures. Unfortunately the list of nodes is 2D (net/node), and this creates problems when exporting echomail across zones. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> PTH: <list of nodes> </head> <p> Not yet a <name>FSC</name> (or is it?), this is a 5D-version of the <gi>PATH</gi> kludge, which sticks to the top of the msg. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> PID: <identifier> <version> [serialno] </head> <p> Proposed in <name>FSC-0046</name>, this takes a stab at the tearline abuse, and puts <q>safe</q> information about the first mail processing software in the line. This could be message editors, mail scanners and other stuff. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Realname: <Name> </head> <p> This kludge was probably born in Russia because of some software was not able to properly handle non-<abbr>ASCII</abbr> characters in the header lines. Name should be written in national codepage. Otherwise I don't see any reason for this kludge. I don't know any software that generate this kludge. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> RFD: <id> </head> <p> Received For Distribution. A kludge inserted by one of the file announcement programs. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> REPLY: <replyaddress> <replyserialno> </head> <p> Defined in <name>FTS-0009</name>, this is the <gi>MSGID</gi> counterpart. When replying to a message with a <gi>MSGID</gi>, the <gi>MSGID</gi> of the original is renamed to <gi>REPLY</gi>. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> RID:<stuff> </head> <p> Unknown kludge which looks suspiciously like the <gi>EID</gi>. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> ROUTE <list of nodes and points> </head> <p> Specifies route path. Currently supported by <name>Unimail</name> and <name>S\Tosser</name>. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> SEEN-BY: <list of nodes> </head> <p> Defined in <name>FTS-0004</name>, this is a tool for finding dupe links and other structural faults in the net structures. Depending on the mail tosser, the seen-by's may or may not have a preceding ^a character. Unfortunately the list of nodes is 2D (net/node), and this can create problems when exporting echomail across zones. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> SN:<serialno> </head> <p> Serial number inserted by the <name>Dutchie</name> message editor. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> SOT: </head> <p> Start Of Text. See <gi>EOT</gi>. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> SPLIT: </head> <p> Defined in <name>FSC-0047</name>. A method for splitting large msgs so that some mail processors don't choke on them. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> TCL1:, TCL2: <long hex string> </head> <p> Old obsolete swedish dupecheck/replylink kludge. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> TID: </head> <p> Tosser <abbr>ID</abbr>. Similar to the <gi>PID</gi>, but specifically for mail processors. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> TOPT <to point> </head> <p> Defined in <name>FTS-0001</name>, this tells the point number of the destination. Netmail only. <name>GoldED+</name> can generate this line. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> TZ <offset from UTC> </head> <p> Specifies the time to <hi>add</hi> to the header time to get the <abbr>UTC</abbr> (Universal Time Coordinated) time. Generated by newer versions of the <name>TrackMail</name> netmail processor. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> TZUTC </head> <p> See <gi>TZ</gi>. <name>GoldED+</name> can generate this line. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> Via: <netmail tossing info> </head> <p> Routed netmail messages usually gets a <gi>Via</gi> line for each node it passes through. This can be used for tracing faults in the netmail routing structure. </p> </div2> <div2> <head> XID:<stuff> </head> <p> Unknown kludge which looks suspiciously like the EID. </p> </div2> </div1> <!-- --------------------------------------------------------------------- --> </body> <!-- --------------------------------------------------------------------- --> </text> <!-- --------------------------------------------------------------------- --> </TEI.2>